DLK - Door & Lock PDF

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY
SECTION DLKDOOR & LOCK

B
E
CONTENTS
TYPE 1 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ....34 F
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..................... 24 BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION ...............................36
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Dia-
G
APPLICATION NOTICE .....................................24 gram ........................................................................36
Information .............................................................. 24 BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System De-
scription ...................................................................36
PRECAUTION .............................................. 25 H
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION ........................................37
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................25 SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ....37
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ..................38 I
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................. 25 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- tem Diagram ............................................................38
tion After Battery Disconnect ................................... 25 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys- J
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.... 26 tem Description ........................................................39
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ........... 26 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION ....................................40
Work ........................................................................ 27 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Diagram ....40 DLK
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Descrip-
PREPARATION ........................................... 28
tion ...........................................................................40
PREPARATION ..................................................28 L
WARNING FUNCTION ..............................................41
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 28
WARNING FUNCTION : System Description ..........41
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 29 SYSTEM (BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM) ... 45 M
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................29 System Description ..................................................45
Component Parts Location .................................... 29 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 46
Component Description .......................................... 30 N
COMMON ITEM .........................................................46
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) ....31 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
System Diagram ...................................................... 31 COMMON ITEM) .....................................................46 O
System Description ................................................. 31
DOOR LOCK ..............................................................47
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ..........33 DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
DOOR LOCK) (Type 1) ...........................................47 P
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ................................... 33
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Diagram.... 33 INTELLIGENT KEY ....................................................48
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip- INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM -
tion .......................................................................... 33 INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 1) ..................................48
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION .......................................... 34 TRUNK .......................................................................52
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram ......... 34
DLK-1
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 87
(Type 1) .................................................................. 52
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............. 88
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 54
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 88
BCM ................................................................... 54 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 88
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 54 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 88
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 55 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 89

PASSENGER SIDE :
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM .................................. 55 Component Function Check .................................. 89
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 55 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 89
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 67 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR ................. 91

Component Function Check .................................. 91
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 67 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91
Work Flow ............................................................... 67
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................... 92
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 70 Component Function Check .................................. 92
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 92
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 70 Component Inspection ............................................ 93
DTC Logic ............................................................... 70
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 70 DOOR SWITCH ................................................. 94
Component Function Check .................................. 94
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 73 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 94
DTC Logic ............................................................... 73 Component Inspection ............................................ 95
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 73
HAZARD FUNCTION ........................................ 97
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR ................ 76 Component Function Check .................................. 97
Component Function Check ................................. 76 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 76
INFORMATION DISPLAY ................................. 98
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ...................... 78 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 98
Component Function Check ................................. 78
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 78 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ......................... 99
Component Inspection ............................................ 79 Component Inspection ............................................ 99
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .................... 80 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ........ 100
Component Function Check ................................. 80 Component Function Check ................................ 100
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 80 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100
Component Inspection ............................................ 81
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 102
COMBINATION METER BUZZER .................... 82
Component Function Check ................................. 82 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 102
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 82 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 102
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ................................ 83 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 104

PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 104
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 83
REAR BUMPER ...................................................... 106
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 83
REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 106
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 83
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 84 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 109
PASSENGER SIDE : FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 109
Component Function Check ................................. 84 FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 109
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 84
REAR DOOR ........................................................... 109
REAR LH ................................................................... 85 REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 109
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............... 85
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 85 SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR ............................. 111
REAR RH .................................................................. 86 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 111
REAR RH : Component Function Check .............. 86 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 111
DLK-2
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 111 ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis
Procedure .............................................................. 123 A
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 112
PASSENGER SIDE : DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............. 123
Component Function Check ................................ 112 DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De-
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 112 scription ................................................................. 123 B
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag-
REAR LH ................................................................. 113 nosis Procedure ..................................................... 123
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 113 C
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 113 PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .... 124
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
REAR RH ................................................................. 114 Description ............................................................. 124
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 114 PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : D
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 114 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124
UNLOCK SENSOR .......................................... 116 BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .......................... 124 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116 BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description .. 124
Component Inspection .......................................... 117 BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis
Procedure .............................................................. 124
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 118 F
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN-
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
TELLIGENT KEY ............................................ 126
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 118 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126 G
ALL DOOR .............................................................. 118
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ............... 128
ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 118
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 128
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 118 H
FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 118
SUPER LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE ........... 129
FRONT DOOR : Description ................................. 118 ALL DOOR ............................................................... 129
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 118 I
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 129
REAR DOOR ........................................................... 119
REAR DOOR : Description ................................... 119 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 129 J
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 119 DRIVER SIDE : Description ................................... 129
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 129
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 119
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 119 PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 129 DLK
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 119 PASSENGER SIDE : Description .......................... 129
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 120
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 120 L
REAR LH .................................................................. 130
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 120 REAR LH : Description .......................................... 130
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 130
REAR LH ................................................................. 120 M
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 120 REAR RH ................................................................. 130
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 120 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 130
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 130
REAR RH ................................................................. 120 N
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 121 IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 121 DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 132
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132 O
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 122 ATE .................................................................. 133
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122 P
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............................. 123 OPERATE ....................................................... 134
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES ........................ 123 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 134
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description.. 123 HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 135
DLK-3
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................135 HRA2DDT : Removal and Installation ................... 155
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- K9K .......................................................................... 156

ERATE ............................................................. 136 K9K : Exploded View ............................................ 156
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................136 K9K : Removal and Installation ............................. 156
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES R9M ......................................................................... 157

NOT ILLUMINATE ........................................... 137 R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 157
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................137 R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 158
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- FRONT FENDER .............................................. 159
ERATE ............................................................. 138 Exploded View ...................................................... 159
Removal and Installation ....................................... 159
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................138
ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE ......... 139 FRONT DOOR .................................................. 161
Exploded View ...................................................... 161
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 161
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP-
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 161
ERATE ............................................................. 140 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 162
DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 163
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER- DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 163
ATE .................................................................. 141
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................141 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 163
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 163
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN- DOOR HINGE : Inspection ................................... 164
ING DOES NOT OPERATE ............................. 142
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................142 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 164
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 164
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ......................... 165
ATE .................................................................. 143
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................143 REAR DOOR .................................................... 166
Exploded View ...................................................... 166
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 166
NOSES ............................................................. 144
Work Flow ..............................................................144
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 167
Inspection Procedure .............................................146
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................148 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 168
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 168
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 150
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 168
HOOD ............................................................... 150 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 168
Exploded View .......................................................150 DOOR HINGE : Inspection ................................... 169
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................150 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 169
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....151 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 169
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................151 DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ......................... 170
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................153 BACK DOOR .................................................... 171
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............153 Exploded View ...................................................... 171
HOOD HINGE : Inspection ....................................154
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 171
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................154 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- tion ........................................................................ 171
tion .........................................................................154 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 172
HOOD INSULATOR .................................................154 BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 174
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation ....154 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 155 tion ........................................................................ 174
HRA2DDT .................................................................155 BACK DOOR HINGE .............................................. 174

HRA2DDT : Exploded View ...................................155 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation . 174
DLK-4
BACK DOOR HINGE : Inspection ......................... 175 FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 190
A
BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 175 FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ......................................... 191
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 175 FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa-
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal ............................. 175 tion ......................................................................... 191
B
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 176 FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 192
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 176 Installation ............................................................. 192 C
HOOD LOCK .................................................... 177 DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 193
Exploded View ...................................................... 177 Removal and Installation ....................................... 193
D
HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 177 INSIDE KEY ANTENNA .................................. 194
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 177
CONSOLE ................................................................ 194
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 178 CONSOLE : Removal and Installation ................... 194 E
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 178 LUGGAGE ROOM ................................................... 194
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation ...... 194
F
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 178
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 195
Installation ............................................................. 178
OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 195 G
HOOD SAFETY HOOK ........................................... 179 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 195
HOOD SAFETY HOOK : Removal and Installation
REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 195
.. 179
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation .......... 195 H
Inspection .............................................................. 179
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 196
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 180
Exploded View ...................................................... 180 I
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 181
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 197
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 181
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 181 TYPE 2 J
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 181 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................. 198
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 181
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 198 DLK
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 181 Information ............................................................. 198
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 181
PRECAUTION ............................................ 199 L
REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 184
Exploded View ...................................................... 184 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 199
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 184 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- M
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 184 SIONER" ............................................................... 199
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 185 Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota-
tion After Battery Disconnect ................................. 199 N
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 185
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 200
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal .......... 200
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 185 Work ...................................................................... 201 O
PREPARATION ......................................... 202
BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 188
Exploded View ...................................................... 188 PREPARATION ............................................... 202 P
Removal and Installation ....................................... 188 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 202
Inspection .............................................................. 189
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 203
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 190
COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 203
Exploded View ...................................................... 190
Component Parts Location .................................. 203
FUEL FILLER LID ................................................... 190 Component Description ........................................ 204
DLK-5
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) ... 205 LHD .......................................................................... 229
System Diagram ....................................................205 LHD : Wiring Diagram ........................................... 229
System Description ................................................205
RHD ......................................................................... 241
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ....... 207 RHD : Wiring Diagram .......................................... 242
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ..................................207 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 255

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Diagram .. 207
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip- DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 255
tion .........................................................................207 Work Flow ............................................................. 255
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ........................................208 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 258

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram ........208
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ....208 B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................ 258
DTC Logic ............................................................. 258
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION .............................210 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 258
gram ......................................................................211 B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................ 261
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System De- DTC Logic ............................................................. 261
scription .................................................................211 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 261
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ................212 BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR ............... 264
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys- Component Function Check ................................ 264
tem Diagram ..........................................................212 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 264
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
tem Description ......................................................212
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ..................... 266
Component Function Check ................................ 266
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION ...................................213 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 266
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Diagram .. 214 Component Inspection .......................................... 267
tion .........................................................................214 BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .................. 268
WARNING FUNCTION .............................................214 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 268
WARNING FUNCTION : System Description ........214 Component Inspection .......................................... 269
SYSTEM (BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM) . 219 COMBINATION METER BUZZER ................... 270
System Description ................................................219 Component Function Check ................................ 270
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 220
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 271
COMMON ITEM .......................................................220
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 271
COMMON ITEM) ...................................................220 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 271
DOOR LOCK ............................................................221
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 272
DOOR LOCK) (Type 2) .........................................221 PASSENGER SIDE :
INTELLIGENT KEY ..................................................222 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 272
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM -
INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 2) ................................222 REAR LH ................................................................. 274
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 274
TRUNK .....................................................................227 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 274
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK)
(Type 2) .................................................................227 REAR RH ................................................................. 275
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 275
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 228 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 275
BCM ................................................................. 228 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 277
List of ECU Reference ...........................................228
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 277
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 229 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 277
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................ 229
DLK-6
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 278 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 300
PASSENGER SIDE : A
Component Function Check ................................ 278 PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 301
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 278 PASSENGER SIDE : Description .......................... 301
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR ................ 280 B
REAR LH .................................................................. 301
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 301
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 301 C
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............................. 281
REAR RH ................................................................. 301
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 302
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 302 D
Component Inspection .......................................... 282
DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 284
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR
E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 284 KEY CYLINDER .............................................. 303
Component Inspection .......................................... 286 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 303
HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 287 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH F

Component Function Check ................................ 287 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................ 304
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES ........................ 304
G
INFORMATION DISPLAY ................................ 288 ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description.. 304
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 288 ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis
Procedure .............................................................. 304
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ........................ 289 H
Component Inspection .......................................... 289 DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............. 304
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De-
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ........ 290 scription ................................................................. 304
I
Component Function Check ................................ 290 DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 290 nosis Procedure ..................................................... 304
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 292 PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .... 305 J
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 292 Description ............................................................. 305
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 292 PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : DLK
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 294
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 294 BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .......................... 305
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description .. 305 L
REAR BUMPER ...................................................... 296
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis
REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 297 Procedure .............................................................. 305
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 299 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN- M
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH TELLIGENT KEY ............................................ 307

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 299 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 307
N
ALL DOOR .............................................................. 299 BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ............... 309
ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 299 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 309
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 299 IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION O
FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 299 DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 310
FRONT DOOR : Description ................................. 299 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 310
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 299 P
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
REAR DOOR ........................................................... 300 ATE .................................................................. 311
REAR DOOR : Description ................................... 300 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 311
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 300
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 300 OPERATE ....................................................... 312
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 300 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 312
DLK-7
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES HRA2DDT ................................................................ 333
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 313 HRA2DDT : Exploded View .................................. 333
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................313 HRA2DDT : Removal and Installation ................... 333
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- MR20DD .................................................................. 334

ERATE ............................................................. 314 MR20DD : Exploded View .................................... 334
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................314 MR20DD : Removal and Installation ..................... 335
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES K9K .......................................................................... 335

K9K : Exploded View ............................................ 336
NOT ILLUMINATE ........................................... 315
K9K : Removal and Installation ............................. 336
R9M ......................................................................... 336
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 337
ERATE ............................................................. 316 R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 338
FRONT FENDER .............................................. 339
ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE ......... 317 Exploded View ...................................................... 339
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................317 Removal and Installation ....................................... 339
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP- FRONT DOOR .................................................. 341
ERATE ............................................................. 318 Exploded View ...................................................... 341
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 341
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER- DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 341
ATE .................................................................. 319 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 342
DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 343
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN- DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 343
ING DOES NOT OPERATE ............................. 320
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 343
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 343
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER- DOOR HINGE : Inspection ................................... 344
ATE .................................................................. 321 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 344
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 344
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG- DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ......................... 345
NOSES ............................................................. 322 REAR DOOR .................................................... 346
Work Flow ..............................................................322 Exploded View ...................................................... 346
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................326 DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 346
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 328 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 347
HOOD ............................................................... 328 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 348
Exploded View .......................................................328 DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 348
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................328 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 348
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....329 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 348
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................329 DOOR HINGE : Inspection ................................... 349
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................331 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 349
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............331 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 349
HOOD HINGE : Inspection ....................................332 DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ......................... 350
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................332 BACK DOOR .................................................... 171
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- Exploded View ...................................................... 351
tion .........................................................................332
HOOD INSULATOR .................................................332 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation ....332 tion ........................................................................ 351
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 352
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 333
DLK-8
BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 354 Inspection .............................................................. 370
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa- A
tion ........................................................................ 354 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 371
Exploded View ....................................................... 371
BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 354
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 354 FUEL FILLER LID .................................................... 372 B
BACK DOOR HINGE : Inspection ......................... 355 FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 372
BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 355 FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ......................................... 373
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- C
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 355
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal ............................. 355 tion ......................................................................... 373
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 356 FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 374 D
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 356 Installation ............................................................. 374
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 376 E

HOOD LOCK .................................................... 357
Exploded View ...................................................... 357 Removal and Installation ....................................... 376
HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 358 INSIDE KEY ANTENNA .................................. 377 F

CONSOLE ................................................................ 377
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 358 CONSOLE : Removal and Installation ................... 377
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and G
LUGGAGE ROOM ................................................... 377
Installation ............................................................. 359
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation ...... 377
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 378 H
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 359 OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 378
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 378
HOOD SAFETY HOOK ........................................... 360 I
HOOD SAFETY HOOK : Removal and Installation REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 378
.. 360 REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation .......... 378
Inspection .............................................................. 360 J
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 361 Removal and Installation ....................................... 379
Exploded View ...................................................... 361
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 380 DLK
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 361 Removal and Installation ....................................... 380
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 361
TYPE 3
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 362
L
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 362 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................. 381
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 362 APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 381
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 362 Information ............................................................. 381 M
PRECAUTION ............................................ 382
REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 365 N
Exploded View ...................................................... 365
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 382
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 365 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 365 SIONER" ............................................................... 382 O
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 366 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 382
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal .......... 382
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 366 Work ...................................................................... 384 P
PREPARATION ......................................... 385
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 366
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 366 PREPARATION ............................................... 385
Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 385
BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 369
Exploded View ...................................................... 369 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 386
DLK-9
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 386 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ..................... 416
Component Parts Location ..................................386 Component Function Check ................................ 416
Component Description ........................................386 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 416
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ..................... 387
System Diagram ....................................................387 DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 418
System Description ................................................387
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 418
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ........... 389 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 418
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ................389
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys- PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 419
tem Diagram ..........................................................389 PASSENGER SIDE :
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys- Component Function Check ................................ 419
tem Description ......................................................389 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 419
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION .......................................390 REAR LH ................................................................. 420

SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram ......390 REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 420
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description .. 390 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 420
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM ................... 392 REAR RH ................................................................. 421

System Description ................................................392 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 421
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 422
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 393
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 423
COMMON ITEM .......................................................393
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 423
COMMON ITEM) ...................................................393 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 423
DOOR LOCK ............................................................393
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 424
DOOR LOCK) (Type 3) .........................................394 PASSENGER SIDE :
MULTI REMOTE ENT ..............................................394 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 424
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Type 3) ...............394 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR ................ 426
TRUNK .....................................................................396 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 426
(Type 3) .................................................................396 DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 427
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 397 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 427
BCM ................................................................. 397
List of ECU Reference ...........................................397 HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 430
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 398 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 430
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................ 398 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 431
Wiring Diagram ......................................................398
FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 431
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 410 FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 431
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 410 REAR DOOR ........................................................... 431
Work Flow ..............................................................410 REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 431
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION .......................... 413 SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR ............................. 433
Description .............................................................413
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 433
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 414 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 433
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR .............. 414
Component Function Check ................................414 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 434
DLK-10
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 447
Component Function Check ................................ 434 A
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 434 SUPER LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE ........... 448
REAR LH ................................................................. 435 ALL DOOR ............................................................... 448

REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 435 ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 448 B
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 435 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 448
REAR RH ................................................................. 436 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 448
C
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 436
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 448
UNLOCK SENSOR .......................................... 438 REAR LH .................................................................. 449
D
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 438 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 449
REAR RH ................................................................. 449 E
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 440 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 449
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 440 ATE .................................................................. 450 F
ALL DOOR .............................................................. 440
ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 440 AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT G
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 440 OPERATE ....................................................... 451
FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 440 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 451
FRONT DOOR : Description ................................. 441 UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- H
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 441
ERATE ............................................................. 452
REAR DOOR ........................................................... 441 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 452
REAR DOOR : Description ................................... 441 I
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE ............................................................. 453
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 441 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 453 J
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 442
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 442 HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 454
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 442 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 454 DLK
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 442
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 442 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES ............................................................ 455 L
REAR LH ................................................................. 442 Work Flow .............................................................. 455
REAR LH : Description .......................................... 442 Inspection Procedure ............................................. 457
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 442 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 459
M
REAR RH ................................................................. 443
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 461
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 443
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 443 HOOD .............................................................. 461 N
Exploded View ....................................................... 461
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR HOOD ASSEMBLY .................................................. 461
KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 444 HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 462 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 444 HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 462
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 464

KEYFOB ........................................................... 445 HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 464 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 445 HOOD HINGE : Inspection .................................... 465
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ................ 446 HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 465
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 446 HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa-
tion ......................................................................... 465
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES
NOT ILLUMINATE ............................................ 447 HOOD INSULATOR ................................................. 465
DLK-11
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation ....465 BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 485
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 466 tion ........................................................................ 485
HRA2DDT .................................................................466 BACK DOOR HINGE .............................................. 485
HRA2DDT : Exploded View ...................................466 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation . 485
HRA2DDT : Removal and Installation ...................466 BACK DOOR HINGE : Inspection ......................... 486
K9K ...........................................................................467 BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 486
K9K : Exploded View .............................................467 BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 486
K9K : Removal and Installation .............................467 BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal ............................. 486
R9M ..........................................................................468 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 487
R9M : Exploded View ............................................468 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
R9M : Removal and Installation .............................469 Installation ............................................................. 487
FRONT FENDER ............................................. 470 HOOD LOCK .................................................... 488
Exploded View .......................................................470 Exploded View ...................................................... 488
Removal and Installation .......................................470
HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 488
FRONT DOOR ................................................. 472 HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 488
Exploded View .......................................................472
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ........................ 489
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................472 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....472 Installation ............................................................. 489
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................473
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................474 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........474 Installation ............................................................. 489
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................474 HOOD SAFETY HOOK ........................................... 490
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............474 HOOD SAFETY HOOK : Removal and Installation
DOOR HINGE : Inspection ....................................475 . 490
Inspection .............................................................. 490
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................475
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..475 FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 491
DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ..........................476 Exploded View ...................................................... 491
REAR DOOR ................................................... 477 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 492
Exploded View .......................................................477 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 492
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................477
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....477 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 492
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................478 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 492
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................479 OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 492
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........479 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 492
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................479 REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 495
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............479 Exploded View ...................................................... 495
DOOR HINGE : Inspection ....................................480
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 495
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................480 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 495
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..480 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ..................................... 496
DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ..........................481
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 496
BACK DOOR ................................................... 171 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 496
Exploded View .......................................................482
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 496
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY .......................................482 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 496
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
tion .........................................................................482 BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 499
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................483 Exploded View ...................................................... 499
DLK-12
Inspection .............................................................. 500 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
COMMON ITEM) ................................................... 517 A
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 501
Exploded View ...................................................... 501 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 517
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
FUEL FILLER LID ................................................... 501 DOOR LOCK) (Type 4) ......................................... 518 B
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 501
MULTI REMOTE ENT .............................................. 518
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ........................................ 502 MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- C
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Type 4) ............... 519
tion ........................................................................ 502
TRUNK ..................................................................... 520
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 503 TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) D
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and (Type 4) ................................................................. 520
Installation ............................................................. 503
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 522
DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 504 E
Removal and Installation ....................................... 504 BCM ................................................................. 522
List of ECU Reference ........................................... 522
KEYFOB BATTERY ......................................... 505 F
Removal and Installation ....................................... 505 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 523
TYPE 4
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ............................... 523
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................... 506 G
LHD .......................................................................... 523
APPLICATION NOTICE ................................... 506 LHD : Wiring Diagram ............................................ 523
Information ............................................................ 506 H
RHD .......................................................................... 535
PRECAUTION ............................................ 507 RHD : Wiring Diagram ........................................... 536
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 507 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 549 I

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ..... 549
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
Work Flow .............................................................. 549
SIONER" ............................................................... 507 J
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 507 KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION ......................... 552
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ......... 507 Description ............................................................. 552
Work ...................................................................... 509
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 553 DLK
PREPARATION ......................................... 510
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR ............. 553
PREPARATION ................................................ 510 Component Function Check ................................ 553 L
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 510 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 553
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 511 BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ................... 555
Component Function Check ................................ 555 M
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 511 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 555
Component Inspection ........................................... 556
Component Description ........................................ 511 N
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR .............................. 557
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ...................... 512
System Diagram .................................................... 512 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 557
System Description ............................................... 512 DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 557 O
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ............ 514
System Diagram .................................................... 514 PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 558
P
System Description ............................................... 514 PASSENGER SIDE :
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM .................... 516 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 558
System Description ............................................... 516
REAR LH .................................................................. 560
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) .......................... 517 REAR LH : Component Function Check .............. 560
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 560
COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 517
DLK-13
REAR RH .................................................................561 DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 579
REAR RH : Component Function Check .............561 DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................. 580
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................561 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 580
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 563 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 580
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 580
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................563 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 580
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check .......563
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................563 REAR LH ................................................................. 580
REAR LH : Description ......................................... 580
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................564 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 580
PASSENGER SIDE :
Component Function Check ................................564 REAR RH ................................................................. 581
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........564 REAR RH : Description ......................................... 581
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 581
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR ............... 566
Component Function Check ................................566 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................566 DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR
KEY CYLINDER ............................................... 582
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 567 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 582
Component Function Check ................................567
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................567 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
Component Inspection ...........................................569 KEYFOB ........................................................... 583
HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 570
Component Function Check ................................570 BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ................ 584
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................570 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 584
KEY SWITCH ................................................... 571 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES
Component Function Check ..................................571 NOT ILLUMINATE ............................................ 585
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................571 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 585
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 573 ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
Component Inspection ...........................................573 ATE ................................................................... 586
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 574 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 586
FRONT DOOR ..........................................................574 AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT

FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..................574 OPERATE ......................................................... 587
REAR DOOR ............................................................574
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................574 UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE .............................................................. 588
UNLOCK SENSOR .......................................... 576 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 588
Component Inspection ...........................................577 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE .............................................................. 589
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 578 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 589
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 578 NOT OPERATE ................................................ 590
ALL DOOR ...............................................................578
ALL DOOR : Description .......................................578 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................578 NOSES .............................................................. 591
FRONT DOOR ..........................................................578 Work Flow ............................................................. 591
FRONT DOOR : Description .................................579 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 593
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ..................579 Diagnostic Worksheet ........................................... 595
REAR DOOR ............................................................579 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 597

REAR DOOR : Description ....................................579
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................579
HOOD ............................................................... 597
Exploded View ...................................................... 597
DLK-14
HOOD ASSEMBLY ................................................. 597 DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 617
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 598 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 617 A
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 598 DOOR HINGE : Inspection .................................... 618
HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 600 DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................ 618

HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 600 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 618 B
HOOD HINGE : Inspection .................................... 601 DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection .......................... 619
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 601 BACK DOOR ................................................... 171 C

HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- Exploded View ....................................................... 620
tion ........................................................................ 601
HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 601 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- D
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation .. 601 tion ......................................................................... 620
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................ 621
E
BACK DOOR STRIKER ........................................... 623
HRA2DDT ................................................................ 602 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
HRA2DDT : Exploded View .................................. 602 tion ......................................................................... 623
HRA2DDT : Removal and Installation ................... 602 F
BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 623
MR20DD .................................................................. 603 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 623
MR20DD : Exploded View ..................................... 603 BACK DOOR HINGE : Inspection ......................... 624
MR20DD : Removal and Installation ..................... 604 G
BACK DOOR STAY ................................................. 624
K9K .......................................................................... 604 BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 624
K9K : Exploded View ............................................. 605 BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal .............................. 624 H
K9K : Removal and Installation ............................. 605
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 625
R9M .......................................................................... 605 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 606 Installation ............................................................. 625 I
R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 607
HOOD LOCK ................................................... 626
FRONT FENDER .............................................. 608 Exploded View ....................................................... 626
Exploded View ...................................................... 608 J
Removal and Installation ....................................... 608 HOOD LOCK ............................................................ 627
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 627
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 610 DLK
Exploded View ...................................................... 610 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 627
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 610 Installation ............................................................. 628
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 610 L
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 611 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 628
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 612 Installation ............................................................. 628 M
HOOD SAFETY HOOK ............................................ 629
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 612 HOOD SAFETY HOOK : Removal and Installation
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 612 .. 629 N
DOOR HINGE : Inspection .................................... 613 Inspection .............................................................. 629
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 613 FRONT DOOR LOCK ..................................... 630
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 613 O
Exploded View ....................................................... 630
DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ......................... 614
DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 630
REAR DOOR .................................................... 615 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 630 P
Exploded View ...................................................... 615 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 631
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 615 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 631
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 615 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 631
OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 631
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 617 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 631
DLK-15
REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 634 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 652
Exploded View .......................................................634 Component Parts Location .................................. 652
Component Description ........................................ 653
DOOR LOCK ............................................................634
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............634 SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) .... 654
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ......................................635 System Diagram ................................................... 654
INSIDE HANDLE ......................................................635
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .........635 SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ........ 657
OUTSIDE HANDLE ..................................................635 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ................................. 657
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .....635 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Diagram . 657
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip-
BACK DOOR LOCK ........................................ 638 tion ........................................................................ 657
Exploded View .......................................................638
Removal and Installation .......................................638 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ....................................... 658
Inspection ..............................................................639 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram ....... 658
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ... 658
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 640
Exploded View .......................................................640 BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION ............................ 660
FUEL FILLER LID ....................................................641 gram ...................................................................... 661
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation .......641 BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System De-
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK .........................................642 scription ................................................................. 661
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ............... 662
tion .........................................................................642 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE .............................643 tem Diagram ......................................................... 662
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
Installation .............................................................643 tem Description ..................................................... 662
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 645 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION .................................. 664

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Diagram . 664
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 646 tion ........................................................................ 664
WARNING FUNCTION ............................................ 665
TYPE 5 WARNING FUNCTION : System Description ....... 665
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................... 647 SYSTEM (BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM) .. 669
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 647
Information .............................................................647 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 670
PRECAUTION ............................................ 648 COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 670
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 648 COMMON ITEM) .................................................. 670
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 671
SIONER" ................................................................648 DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rota- DOOR LOCK) (Type 5) ......................................... 671
tion After Battery Disconnect .................................648
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..649 INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 672
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ..........649 INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM -
Work ......................................................................650 INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 5) ............................... 672
TRUNK .................................................................... 676

PREPARATION .......................................... 651
PREPARATION ............................................... 651 (Type 5) ................................................................. 676
Commercial Service Tools .....................................651
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 652
BCM .................................................................. 678
DLK-16
List of ECU Reference .......................................... 678 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 727
A
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 679 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 727
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 727
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 679 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 727
B
LHD .......................................................................... 679 PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 728
LHD : Wiring Diagram ........................................... 679 PASSENGER SIDE :
Component Function Check ................................ 728 C
RHD ......................................................................... 691
RHD : Wiring Diagram ........................................... 692
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR .............. 730
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 705 Component Function Check ................................ 730 D
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 705 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 730
Work Flow ............................................................. 705 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................ 731 E
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 708 Component Function Check ................................ 731
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................ 708 Component Inspection ........................................... 732
F
DTC Logic ............................................................. 708
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 734
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................ 711 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 734 G
DTC Logic ............................................................. 711 Component Inspection ........................................... 736
HAZARD FUNCTION ...................................... 737
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR .............. 714 Component Function Check ................................ 737 H
Component Function Check ................................ 714 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 737
INFORMATION DISPLAY ............................... 738 I
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 716 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 738
Component Inspection ........................................... 739 J
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .................. 718 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 740
Component Function Check ................................ 718 DLK
Component Inspection .......................................... 719 OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 742
COMBINATION METER BUZZER ................... 720 L
DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 742
Component Function Check ................................ 720 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 742
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 744 M
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 721 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 744
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 721 REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 746
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 721 REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 747 N
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 749
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 722
O
PASSENGER SIDE : DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
Component Function Check ................................ 722 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 749
ALL DOOR ............................................................... 749 P
REAR LH ................................................................. 724 ALL DOOR : Description ....................................... 749
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 724 ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 749
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 724
FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 749
REAR RH ................................................................. 725 FRONT DOOR : Description ................................. 749
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 725 FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 749
REAR DOOR ............................................................ 750
DLK-17
REAR DOOR : Description ....................................750 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ....................750 ERATE .............................................................. 762
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................750
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................750 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................750 NOT ILLUMINATE ............................................ 763
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................751 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 763
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ..........................751 OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP-
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........751
ERATE .............................................................. 764
REAR LH ..................................................................751 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 764
REAR LH : Description ..........................................751
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................751
P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UN-
LOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ...... 765
REAR RH .................................................................751 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 765
REAR RH : Description .........................................752
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................752 P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
ATE ................................................................... 766
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 766
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................. 753
REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES .........................753 ATE ................................................................... 767
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description..753
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ..................................... 767
Procedure ..............................................................753 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description ............. 767
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Proce-
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............753 dure ....................................................................... 767
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De-
scription .................................................................753 INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................. 768
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag- INTELLIGENT KEY : Description .......................... 768
nosis Procedure .....................................................753 INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 768
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ....754 SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : NOT OPERATE ................................................ 769
Description .............................................................754 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 769
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................754 INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN-
ING DOES NOT OPERATE .............................. 770
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ..........................754 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 770
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description ..754
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
Procedure ..............................................................754 ATE ................................................................... 771
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN-
TELLIGENT KEY ............................................. 756 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................756 OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ............... 772
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ............... 758
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................758 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES .............................................................. 773
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION Work Flow ............................................................. 773
DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 759 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 775
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................759 Diagnostic Worksheet ........................................... 777
IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 779
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................. 760
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................760 HOOD ............................................................... 779
Exploded View ...................................................... 779
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
OPERATE ........................................................ 761 HOOD ASSEMBLY ................................................. 779
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................761 HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 780
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 780
DLK-18
HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 782 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 800
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 782 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- A
HOOD HINGE : Inspection .................................... 783 tion ......................................................................... 800
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................ 801
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 783
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- BACK DOOR STRIKER ........................................... 803 B
tion ........................................................................ 783 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
tion ......................................................................... 803
HOOD INSULATOR ................................................ 783 C
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation .. 783 BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 803
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 803
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 784 BACK DOOR HINGE : Inspection ......................... 804
D
MR20DD .................................................................. 784 BACK DOOR STAY ................................................. 804
MR20DD : Exploded View ..................................... 784 BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 804
MR20DD : Removal and Installation ..................... 785 BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal .............................. 804 E
R9M .......................................................................... 785 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 805
R9M : Exploded View ............................................ 786 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
R9M : Removal and Installation ............................ 787 Installation ............................................................. 805 F
FRONT FENDER .............................................. 788 HOOD LOCK ................................................... 806
Exploded View ...................................................... 788 Exploded View ....................................................... 806
Removal and Installation ....................................... 788 G
HOOD LOCK ............................................................ 807
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 790 HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 807
Exploded View ...................................................... 790 H
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ......................... 807
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 790 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 790 Installation ............................................................. 808
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 791 I
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 792 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 792 Installation ............................................................. 808 J
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 792 HOOD SAFETY HOOK ............................................ 809
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 792 HOOD SAFETY HOOK : Removal and Installation
DOOR HINGE : Inspection .................................... 793 .. 809 DLK
Inspection .............................................................. 809
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 793
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 793 FRONT DOOR LOCK ..................................... 810
DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ......................... 794 L
Exploded View ....................................................... 810
REAR DOOR .................................................... 795 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 810
Exploded View ...................................................... 795 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 810 M
DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 811
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 795
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 795 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 811
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 796 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 811 N
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 797 OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 811
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 797 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 811
O
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 797 REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 814
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 797 Exploded View ....................................................... 814
DOOR HINGE : Inspection .................................... 798 P
DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 814
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 798 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 814
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 798 DOOR LOCK : Inspection ...................................... 815
DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ......................... 799
INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 815
BACK DOOR .................................................... 171 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 815
Exploded View ...................................................... 800
OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 815
DLK-19
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .....815 PREPARATION ................................................ 834
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 834
BACK DOOR LOCK ........................................ 818
Exploded View .......................................................818 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 835
Inspection ..............................................................819 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 835
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 820 Component Description ........................................ 835
Exploded View .......................................................820
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ...................... 836
FUEL FILLER LID ....................................................821 System Diagram ................................................... 836
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation .......821 System Description ............................................... 836
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK .........................................822 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ............ 838
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- System Diagram ................................................... 838
tion .........................................................................822 System Description ............................................... 838
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE .............................823 BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM .................... 840
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation .............................................................823
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 841
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 825
Removal and Installation .......................................825 COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 841
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA .................................. 826 COMMON ITEM) .................................................. 841
CONSOLE ................................................................826 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 842
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation ...................826 DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
LUGGAGE ROOM ...................................................826 DOOR LOCK) (Type 6) ......................................... 842
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation ......826 MULTI REMOTE ENT ............................................. 843
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA .............................. 827 MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function
(BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Type 6) ............... 843
OUTSIDE HANDLE ..................................................827
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .....827 TRUNK .................................................................... 844
REAR BUMPER .......................................................827 (Type 6) ................................................................. 845
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation ..........827
Removal and Installation .......................................828 BCM .................................................................. 846
List of ECU Reference .......................................... 846
Removal and Installation .......................................829 WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 847
TYPE 6 DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 847
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................... 830 LHD .......................................................................... 847
LHD : Wiring Diagram ........................................... 847
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 830
Information .............................................................830 RHD ......................................................................... 859
RHD : Wiring Diagram .......................................... 860
PRECAUTION ............................................ 831
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 873
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 831
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 873
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Work Flow ............................................................. 873
SIONER" ................................................................831
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..831 KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION .......................... 876
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal ..........831 Description ............................................................ 876
Work ......................................................................832
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 877
PREPARATION .......................................... 834
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR ............... 877
DLK-20
Component Function Check ................................ 877 REAR DOOR ............................................................ 898
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 877 REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 898 A
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH .................... 879 UNLOCK SENSOR ......................................... 900
Component Function Check ................................ 879 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 900
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 879 Component Inspection ........................................... 901 B
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 902
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ............................... 881 C
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 881 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH .......... 902
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 881
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 881 ALL DOOR ............................................................... 902 D
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 882 ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 902
PASSENGER SIDE :
E
Component Function Check ................................ 882 FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 902
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 882 FRONT DOOR : Description ................................. 903
REAR LH ................................................................. 884 F
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............. 884 REAR DOOR ............................................................ 903
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 884 REAR DOOR : Description .................................... 903
REAR RH ................................................................. 885 G
REAR RH : Component Function Check ............. 885 DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 903
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 885 DRIVER SIDE : Description ................................... 904
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 904 H
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............ 887
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 904
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 887 PASSENGER SIDE : Description .......................... 904
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ...... 887 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 904 I
REAR LH .................................................................. 904
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 888 REAR LH : Description .......................................... 904 J
PASSENGER SIDE : REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 904
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 888 REAR RH ................................................................. 905
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 905 DLK
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR ................ 890 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 905
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 890 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
L
KEYFOB .......................................................... 906
DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 891 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 906
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 891 BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ............... 907 M
Component Inspection .......................................... 893 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 907
HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 894 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES

NOT ILLUMINATE .......................................... 908 N
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 894 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 908
KEY SWITCH ................................................... 895 AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT O
Component Function Check .................................. 895 OPERATE ....................................................... 909
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 895 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 909
KEYFOB BATTERY ......................................... 897 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- P
Component Inspection .......................................... 897 ERATE ............................................................. 910
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 898
REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
FRONT DOOR ......................................................... 898
ATE .................................................................. 911
DLK-21
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ......................... 935
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 912
REAR DOOR .................................................... 936
Exploded View ...................................................... 936
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 936
NOSES ............................................................. 913 DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .... 936
Work Flow ..............................................................913
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................917 DOOR STRIKER ..................................................... 938
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 919
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 938
HOOD ............................................................... 919 DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............ 938
Exploded View .......................................................919 DOOR HINGE : Inspection ................................... 939
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................919 DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 939
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....920 DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation . 939
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................920 DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection ......................... 940
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................922 BACK DOOR .................................................... 171
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............922 Exploded View ...................................................... 941
HOOD HINGE : Inspection ....................................923
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................923 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- tion ........................................................................ 941
tion .........................................................................923 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ............... 942
HOOD INSULATOR .................................................923 BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 944
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation ....923 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
tion ........................................................................ 944
BACK DOOR HINGE .............................................. 944
HRA2DDT .................................................................924
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation . 944
HRA2DDT : Exploded View ...................................924
BACK DOOR HINGE : Inspection ......................... 945
HRA2DDT : Removal and Installation ...................924
BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 945
MR20DD ...................................................................925
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 945
MR20DD : Exploded View .....................................925
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal ............................. 945
MR20DD : Removal and Installation .....................926
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 946
R9M ..........................................................................926
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
R9M : Exploded View ............................................927
Installation ............................................................. 946
R9M : Removal and Installation .............................928
HOOD LOCK .................................................... 947
FRONT FENDER ............................................. 929
Exploded View ...................................................... 947
Exploded View .......................................................929
Removal and Installation .......................................929 HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 948
FRONT DOOR ................................................. 931
Exploded View .......................................................931 HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE ........................ 948
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................931
Installation ............................................................. 949
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....931
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................932 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 949
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................933 Installation ............................................................. 949
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........933
HOOD SAFETY HOOK ........................................... 950
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................933
HOOD SAFETY HOOK : Removal and Installation
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............933
. 950
DOOR HINGE : Inspection ....................................934
Inspection .............................................................. 950
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................934
FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 951
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..934
DLK-22
Exploded View ...................................................... 951 BACK DOOR LOCK ....................................... 959
Exploded View ....................................................... 959 A
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 951 Removal and Installation ....................................... 959
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 951 Inspection .............................................................. 960
B
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 961
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 952
Exploded View ....................................................... 961
FUEL FILLER LID .................................................... 962 C
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 952
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 962
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ......................................... 963
REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 955 FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- D
Exploded View ...................................................... 955 tion ......................................................................... 963
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 955
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 964
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 955 E
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation ............................................................. 964
INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 956
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 966 F
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 956
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 967
Removal and Installation ....................................... 967 G
DLK
DLK-23
APPLICATION NOTICE
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [TYPE 1]
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

APPLICATION NOTICE
Information INFOID:0000000010434536
Check the vehicle type to use the service information in this section.
Service information Destination

Type 1 For Europe With Intelligent Key and super lock
• For Europe
Type 2 • For South Africa With Intelligent Key, without super lock
• For Russia, Ukraine and Kazakhstan
Type 3 For Europe Without Intelligent Key, with super lock
• For Europe
Type 4 • For South Africa Without Intelligent Key and super lock
• For Australia
Type 5 With Intelligent Key, without super lock
• For General export
• For Australia
Type 6 Without Intelligent Key and super lock
DLK-24
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [TYPE 1]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010434537
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by E
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
F
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING: H
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing I
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service. J
Precaution Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect
INFOID:0000000010479684
DLK
CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction.
• Before removing and installing any control units, first turn the ignition power source and accessory
power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables. L
• After finishing work, confirm that all control unit connectors are connected properly, then re-connect
both battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing M
work. If a DTC is detected, perform trouble diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results.
For vehicle with steering lock unit, if the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- N
cedure below before starting the repair operation.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
O
1. Connect both battery cables.
NOTE:
Supply power using jumper cables if battery is discharged.
2. Open driver door. P
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
(At this time, the steering lock will be released.)
4. Turn the ignition switch to OFF position with driver door open.
5. Wait for 3 minutes or longer with driver door open.
NOTE:
• Do not close driver door because the steering wheel locks when driver door is closed.
DLK-25
PRECAUTIONS
• The auto acc function is adapted to this vehicle. For this reason, even when the ignition switch is turned
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a
certain amount of time.
6. Disconnect both battery cables. The steering lock will remain released with both battery cables discon-
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
7. Perform the necessary repair operation.
8. When the repair work is completed, re-connect both battery cables. With the brake pedal released, turn
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position.)
9. Perform self-diagnosis check of all control units using CONSULT.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000010434539
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
PIIB3706J
Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010503427
• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, i.e. ACC power is supplied for a certain fixed time.
• When disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, turn off the ACC
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing
“How to disconnect 12V battery terminal” described below.
NOTE:
Some ECUs operate for a certain fixed time even after ignition
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the
battery terminal is disconnected before ECU stops, accidental DTC
detection or ECU data damage may occur.
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat-
tery and the sub battery before turning ON the ignition switch.
NOTE:
SEF289H
If the ignition switch is turned ON with any one of the terminals of
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected.
• After installing the 12V battery, always check "Self Diagnosis Result" of all ECUs and erase DTC.
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error.
HOW TO DISCONNECT 12V BATTERY TERMINAL
Disconnect 12V battery terminal according to instruction described below.
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Turn ignition switch to the OFF position with the driver side door opened.
4. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door.
5. Wait at least 3 minutes. For vehicle with the engine listed below, remove the battery terminal after a lapse
of the specified time.
D4D engine : 20 minutes

HRA2DDT : 12 minutes
K9K engine : 4 minutes
M9R engine : 4 minutes
DLK-26
PRECAUTIONS
R9M engine : 4 minutes
V9X engine : 4 minutes A
CAUTION:
While waiting, never operate the vehicle such as locking, opening, and closing doors. Violation of
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. B
6. Remove 12V battery terminal.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. C
Work INFOID:0000000010434541
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their D
operational.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.
E
DLK
DLK-27
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [TYPE 1]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000010434542
Tool name Description
Engine ear Locates the noise
SIIA0995E
Remover tool Removes the clips, pawls, and metal clips
JMKIA3050ZZ
Power tool
PIIB1407E
DLK-28
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [TYPE 1]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000010434543
B
DLK
JMKIB3265ZZ
M
1. Power window main switch (door lock 2. Push-button ignition switch 3. Combination meter
and unlock switch)
4. BCM 5. Front power window switch (passen- 6. Door switch N
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL ger side) (door lock and unlock switch)
SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
7. Door lock assembly 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Back door opener switch assembly O
10. Inside key antenna (luggage room) 11. Inside key antenna (console) 12. Indicator unit (door lock status indica-
tor)
13. Intelligent Key warning buzzer 14. Outside key antenna 15. Door request switch
P
16. Outside antenna (rear bumper)
A. View with luggage room B. View with center console assembly re- C. View with instrument panel
moved
D. View with front bumper removed E. View with door panel F. View with rear bumper removed
DLK-29
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Description INFOID:0000000010434544
Item Function
• Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM.
Door lock and unlock switch
• Integrated in the power window main switch and center console assembly.
• Performs operation method guide and warning with buzzer.
Combination meter
• Transmits vehicle seep signal to CAN communication line.
• BCM transmits the change in the power supply position with the push-button ignition switch
to IPDM E/R via CAN communication line. IPDM E/R transmits the power supply position
Push-button ignition switch
status via CAN communication line to BCM.
• Immobilizer antenna amp checks Intelligent Key transponder.
BCM detects the vehicle status according to signals from each door switch and each outside/
inside key antenna. BCM transmits drive signal to door lock actuator when BCM receives op-
BCM eration signal from remote keyless entry receiver and each switch.
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed in-
stallation location.
• Inputs locks/unlocks signal from BCM and locks/unlocks each door.
Door lock actuator
• Integrated in each door lock assembly.
Door request switch
• Integrated in the outside handle (driver side, passenger side and back door).
Door switch Detects door open/close condition.
• Detects whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Inside key antenna
• Installed in the instrument center, console and luggage room.
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Warns for an inappropriate operation.
• Detects whether Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
Outside key antenna
• Integrated in the outside handle.
The following functions are available when having and carrying electronic ID.
• Door lock/unlock
Intelligent Key
• Engine start
• Remote control entry function is available when operating on button.
• Inputs super lock set/release signal from BCM and set/release super lock function.
Super lock actuator
Built-in in driver side door lock assembly
Unlock sensor
• Detects door lock condition of driver door
DLK-30
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000010434545
JMKIB2435GB F
System Description INFOID:0000000010434546
G
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Door Lock and Unlock Switch
H
• The door lock and unlock switch (driver side) is built into power window main switch.
• The door lock and unlock switch (passenger side) is built into front power window switch (passenger side).
• Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
locked. I
• Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors actu-
ator are unlocked.
Unlock Sensor J
• BCM locks all doors or unlocks all doors, when driver door lock knob is operated.
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to lock position, locks door
lock actuator of all doors. DLK
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position, unlocks
door lock actuator of all doors.
Operation Condition L
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, door lock and unlock operation is performed using the door lock
and unlock switch.
M
Door lock and unlock switch operation Operation condition
• Doors are not locked by Intelligent Key, door request switch
LOCK/UNLOCK and auto door lock function
• Ignition position warning function is not activated N
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION

Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock /unlock state, refer to INL-8, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP O
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description".
AIR BAG INTERLOCK UNLOCK FUNCTION
When ignition switch is ON and BCM receives shock status signal, it operates automatically to unlock all P
doors. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit sends the shock status signal to BCM via CAN communication.
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION
All doors are locked once, but BCM immediately unlocks all doors, according to driver door lock status
detected by unlock sensor, when door lock operation is performed, driver door is open, and ignition position is
ON.
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR OPERATION
DLK-31
The door lock status indicator indicates door lock status under the following condition.
Indicator operation Ignition position Door status Lock operation

All doors are closed and door
ON (30 minutes timer) OFF Door lock and unlock switch
is locked
ON ON Door lock and unlock switch
is locked
Intelligent Key, door request
ON (1 minute timer) OFF switch or auto door lock func-
is locked
tion
ON ON switch or auto door lock func-
is locked
tion
(All doors are closed → any
door is open) or (All doors are
ON → OFF – –
locked → any door is un-
locked)
ON (timer is running) → ON
OFF → ON – –
(timer is stop)
ON → ON (30 minutes timer) ON → OFF – Door lock and unlock switch
ON → ON (1 minute timer) ON → OFF – switch or auto door lock func-
tion
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION

When driver door or passenger door is opened using the override function, all doors are unlocked.
Unlock function operates when driver door or passenger door is open while all of the following conditions are
satisfied.
• Doors are locked by door lock/unlock switch or by automatic lock/unlock function

• Driver or passenger door switch is switched from OFF to ON
Operation condition
• Anti-hijack function is not activated
• Vehicle speed is 5 km/h (3 MPH) or less
NOTE:
When anti-hijack function is activated, only the applicable door is unlocked.
DLK-32
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
A
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000010434547
B
DLK
L
JMKIB3310GB
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010434548 M
• The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door locks (door lock/
unlock function) by carrying the Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verifica-
tion using two-way communication between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (BCM). N
CAUTION:
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key
• The settings for each function can be changed with CONSULT. O
• If an Intelligent Key is lost, a new Intelligent Key can be registered. A maximum of 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered.
• It is possible to perform a diagnosis on the system and register an Intelligent Key with CONSULT.
P
Function Description Refer
Door lock Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the request switch DLK-34
The back door can be opened by carrying the Intelligent Key and pressing the
Back door open DLK-36
back door opener switch.
When all doors are closed super lock system can be set/release by Intelligent
Super lock DLK-37
Key or door request switch
DLK-33
Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the remote controller button of the In-
Remote keyless entry DLK-39
telligent Key
The key reminder buzzer sounds a warning if the door is locked with the key left
Key reminder DLK-40
inside the vehicle
If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys-
Warning DLK-41
tem is taken, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver
Engine start The engine can be turned on while carrying the Intelligent Key SEC-15
Interior room lamp control Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state INL-8
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000010434549
JMKIB3311GB
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010434550
When pressing the door request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent
Key.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it activates the outside key antenna and
inside key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the
Intelligent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door.
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID.
• BCM lock/unlock each door, sets/releases super lock, and blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock:
2 times) at the same time as a reminder.
NOTE:
Information of super lock function.
Refer to DLK-37, "SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description".
OPERATION CONDITION
DLK-34
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the door request switch is
operated. A
Each door request switch operation Operation condition

• All doors are closed B
• Ignition switch is in the OFF position
Lock • P position warning is not activated
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area C
• All doors are closed
Unlock
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle D
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area *
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.
E
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA
The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the F
driver, passenger door handles (1) and back door handle (2). How-
ever, this operating range depends on the ambient conditions.
G
JMKIA4534ZZ
I
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION
Information of super lock system with anti-hijack function.
J
HAZARD REMINDER FUNCTION
When doors are locked or unlocked by door request switch, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a reminder.
Reminder function does not operate if ignition switch in ON position.
DLK
Door lock operation
Hazard warning lamp blink
(With door request switch)
Lock Once
L
Unlock (all door unlock) Twice

Unlock (anti-hijack operation) Twice (quick)
M
How to Change Reminder Function Operation Mode
With CONSULT
Reminder function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT. N
Refer to DLK-48, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 1)".
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing O
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti-
vate.
P
• Door switch is ON (door is open)
Operating condition • Door is locked
• Push switch is pressed
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-
48, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 1)".
DLK-35
• Door lock status indicator turns indicator lamp ON or OFF and indicates door lock or unlock state.
• For door lock status indicator operation, refer to DLK-31, "System Description".
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.
Remote keyless entry receiver
CAN communication system

Door lock status indicator
Hazard warning lamp

Outside key antenna
Door request switch
Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Door lock actuator
Door lock function
Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
Door lock/unlock function × × × × × × × ×
Hazard reminder function × × × ×
Door lock status indicator operation × ×
Anti-hijack function × × × × × ×
Auto door lock function × × × ×
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000010683500
JMKIB3635GB
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010683393

• When the BCM detects that back door opener switch is pressed, it activates the outside key antenna (rear
bumper) and inside key antenna and transmits the request signal to the Intelligent Key. And then, check that
the Intelligent Key is near the back door.
• If the verification result is OK, BCM opens back door.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, the back door can be opened.
DLK-36
Back door opener switch operation Operation condition A

• All door: locked and closed
Open • Ignition switch: OFF
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area* B
*
: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, back door can be opened from outside of
the vehicle with a spare Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.
C
The outside key antenna detection area of back door open function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding back
door opener switch . However, this operating range depends on D
the ambient conditions.
JMKIA1955ZZ
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS G

Outside key antenna (rear bumper)

H
Back door opener actuator
Back door opener switch

I
Inside key antenna

Function
Back door switch

Intelligent Key
BCM
DLK
Back open function (back door opener switch) × × × × × × × ×
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION L
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010434552
• Super lock provides a higher anti-theft performance than a conventional door lock function. M
• BCM controls the super lock function.
• When all doors are closed super lock system can be set/release by Intelligent Key or door request switch.
• When super lock is set, inside handle of doors do not work. N
SUPER LOCK SET OPERATION (LOCK OPERATION)
Super Lock Set by Intelligent Key
O
When Intelligent Key lock button is operated while all doors are in unlock state, super lock of all doors is set,
and simultaneously, all doors are locked.
Super Lock Set by Door Request Switch P
When door request switch (driver side, passenger side, or back door) is operated while all doors are in unlock
state, super lock of all doors is set, and simultaneously, all doors are locked.
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITH ANTI-HIJACK MODE
Super Lock Release by Intelligent Key
DLK-37
When Intelligent Key unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, driver door are unlocked. When Intelligent Key unlock button is operated again
within 5 seconds of the 1st unlock button operation, all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch (Driver Side)
When driver side door request switch is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, driver door are unlocked. When driver side door request switch is operated
again within 5 seconds of the 1st driver side door request switch operation, all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch (Passenger Side)
When passenger side door request switch is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all
doors is released, and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch (Back Door)
When back door request switch is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, back door are unlocked. When back door request switch is operated again
within 5 seconds of the 1st back door request switch operation, all doors are unlocked.
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITHOUT ANTI-HIJACK MODE
Super Lock Release by Intelligent Key
When Intelligent Key unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is
released, and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
Super Lock Release by Door Request Switch
When door request switch (driver side, passenger side or back door) is operated while super lock of all doors
is set, super lock of all doors is released, and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION SETTING
With CONSULT
Anti-hijack function can be set to ON/OFF using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-47, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Type 1)".
Without CONSULT
Anti-hijack function can be set to ON/OFF by user with a registered Intelligent Keyfob.
• ON/OFF can be switched when Intelligent Key lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for
5 seconds or more while steering lock is locked.
• When mode is switched, hazard warning lamp blinks.
OFF → ON : 1 blink
ON → OFF : 3 blinks
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000010434553
JMKIB3313GB
DLK-38
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010434554
A
The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the remote control entry system. Therefore, it can be used in the
same manner as the remote controller by operating the door lock/unlock button.
OPERATION B
Remote keyless entry system controls operation of the following items.
• Super lock set/release C
• Anti-hijack function
• Hazard reminder function
• Auto door lock
• Door lock status indicator operation D
OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each doors, however the opera- E
ble range may differ according to surroundings.
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal transmitted from F
Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the signal and compares it with the registered key ID to the vehicle.
• BCM transmits door lock/unlock signal to each door lock actuator, super lock actuator and operates each
door lock actuator, when key ID matches. At the same time, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, G
unlock: 2 times).
OPERATION CONDITION H
If the following condition are satisfied, remote keyless entry operation is performed when the Intelligent Key is
operated.
Remote controller operation Operation condition I

• All doors closed
Lock/set • Ignition switch in the OFF position
• P position warning is not activated J
Unlock/release • Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• P position warning is not activated DLK
Information of super lock system with anti-hijack function.
Refer to DLK-48, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 1)". L

After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
M
the following operation, all doors are locked. However, operation check function does not activate.

Operating condition • Door is locked N
48, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 1)". O
• For door lock status indicator operation, refer to DLK-31, "System Description". P

Operation Description
When doors are locked or unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as
a reminder.
DLK-39
Door lock operation

(With Intelligent Key button)
Lock Once

With CONSULT
Reminder function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.

Door lock status indicator

Hazard warning lamp
Combination meter
Door lock actuator
Remote keyless entry functions
Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
Door lock/unlock function by remote control button × × × × ×
Hazard reminder function × × × × × ×
Auto door lock function × × ×
Door lock status indicator operation × ×
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000010434555
JMKIB3314GB
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010434556
Key reminder is the function that prevents the key from being left in the vehicle.
Key reminder has the following 3 functions.
DLK-40
Key remainder func- A

Operation condition Operation
tion
Right after door is locked by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock
knob operation under the following conditions
Driver side door B
• Ignition switch is in the OFF position All doors unlock
opened
• Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
• Driver side door is opened
Right after driver side door is closed under the following conditions C
Driver side door • Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
All doors unlock
closed* • Driver side door is opened
• Driver side door is in unlock state
D
Right after all doors are closed under the following conditions
• All doors unlock
Door is open or closed • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• Any door is opened
ing buzzer E
• All doors are locked.
*:If the door closing impact shocks the door lock knob, or contacts against baggage with the door lock knob might activate the door locks
accidentally but unlock operation is perform in these cases.
CAUTION: F
• The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be
times when the Intelligent Key cannot be detected, and this function does not operate when the Intel-
ligent Key is on the instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system some-
G
times does not operate if the Intelligent Key is in the door pocket for the open door.
WARNING FUNCTION
WARNING FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010434557
H
The warning function are as per the following items and are given to the user as warning information and I
warnings using combinations of Intelligent Key warning buzzer, combination meter buzzer and information dis-
play in combination meter.
• Intelligent Key system malfunction J
• OFF position warning
• P position warning
• Take away warning
• Door lock operation warning DLK
• Engine start information
• Intelligent Key low battery warning
• Key ID verification information L
• Steering lock information
• Key ID warning
OPERATION CONDITION M
Operation condition of warning and information is as per the following table.
Warning/Information functions Operation procedure N

Intelligent Key system malfunction A malfunction is detected on BCM and key warning lamp turns ON
When condition A or B is satisfied
• Condition A O
- Turn ignition switch from ON to OFF while door is open
• Condition B
OFF position warning
- Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while
brake pedal is depressed and ignition switch is LOCK or OFF (When the In- P
telligent Key battery is discharged)
- Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is open)
• Shift position: Except P position
For internal
• Engine is running to stopped (Ignition switch is ON to OFF)
P position warning* • P position warning (For internal) operates
For external • Door switch: ON to OFF (Door is open to close)
• Intelligent Key cannot be detected inside the vehicle
DLK-41
Warning/Information functions Operation procedure
• Ignition switch: Except LOCK or OFF position
Door status changes
• Door switch: ON to OFF (Door is open to close)
from open to close
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle
• Ignition switch: Except OFF position
• Door switch: ON (Door is open)
Take away warning Door status is open
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle during Key ID ver-
ification for 5 seconds
• Ignition switch: OFF position
Push button-ignition
• Press push-button ignition switch
switch operation
When door lock operation is requested while door lock operating condition of
Door lock operation warning
door request switch not satisfied
• Ignition switch: ON position
Ignition switch is ON po-
• Shift position: P position*
sition
• Engine is stopped
• Ignition switch: Except ON position
Ignition switch is except
ON position
• Intelligent Key can be detected inside the vehicle
Engine start information
• Ignition switch: ON position to OFF position
• Shift position: P position
NOTE:
Engine start information turns ON for several seconds and then turns OFF, when
sition to OFF position
ignition switch is turned to the ON position from the OFF position. Engine start
information does not turn ON until opening and closing of driver door is detected
again.
Intelligent Key low battery warning BCM detects that Intelligent Key is low battery, after ignition switch is turned ON
• Ignition switch: LOCK position
Key ID verification information • Push-button ignition switch: Pressed
Steering lock information When the steering lock can not be unlocked
• Push-button ignition switch is pressed
Key ID warning
*: M/T models do not apply.
WARNING METHOD
The following table shows the alarm or warning methods with chime.
Warning chime
Information display Information display Combina- Intelligent
Warning/Information functions
(Symbol) (Message) tion meter Key warn-
buzzer ing buzzer
Key System Error

Intelligent Key system malfunction See Owner′s Manu- — —
al
JMKIB1526ZZ
OFF position warning — — Activate —
DLK-42
Warning chime
Information display Information display A
Warning/Information functions Combina- Intelligent
buzzer ing buzzer
B
P position warn- For internal Shift to Park Activate — C

ing
JMKIB1527ZZ D
For external — — — Active
Door is open to
close
Activate Activate E
Door is open — —
Take away
No Key Detected
warning F
Push-ignition
Activate —
switch operation
JMKIB1526ZZ
G
Door lock operation warning — — — Activate
H
Engine start information (A/T mod-
— — —
els)
I
JMKIB1396ZZ
Engine start information (M/T mod-

— — — DLK
els)
JMKIB3307ZZ L
M
Intelligent Key low battery warning Key Battery Low — —
N
JMKIB1529ZZ
Key ID verification information — — —

P
JMKIB1399ZZ
DLK-43
Warning chime
buzzer ing buzzer
Steering lock information — — —
JMKIB1401ZZ
Key ID warning Key ID Incorrect — —
JMKIB1526ZZ

Combination meter (information display)

Combination meter (warning buzzer)
Intelligent Key warning buzzer

Function Outside key antenna

Door request switch
Inside key antenna
Steering lock unit

Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
Intelligent Key system malfunction × × ×
OFF position warning × × × ×
P position warning × × × × ×
Door is open or close × × × × × × × ×
Door is open × × × × × ×
Take away warning
× × × × × × ×
operation
Door lock operation warning × × × × × × ×
Engine start information × × × × × ×
Intelligent Key low battery warning × × × × ×
Key ID verification information × × × × × ×
Steering lock information × × × ×
Key ID warning × × × × ×
DLK-44
SYSTEM (BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM)
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
JMKIA6011GB
BACK DOOR OPENER OPERATION G

When back door opener switch is pressed, BCM operates back door opener actuator.
NOTE:
Back door opener actuator is not for locking the back door. The function is only to open the back door. H
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, back door opener operation is performed.
I
Back door opener switch operation Operation condition
• All doors are unlocked.
Back door open J
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
NOTE:
• When battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected during all doors unlock state, back door may not
open. DLK
• Regardless of door lock actuator state, BCM resets recognition of all doors unlock state approximately 30
seconds after battery terminal is disconnected and BCM recognizes that all doors are in lock state.
• When battery terminal is reconnected and back door does not open, have BCM recognize that all doors are L
in unlock state.
DLK-45
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000010471212
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Diagnosis mode Function Description

Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
Diagnosis mode
System Sub system selection item
Work Support Data Monitor Active Test
Door lock DOOR LOCK × ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × ×
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
Interior room lamp control INT LAMP ×
Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × ×
PTC heater control AIR CONDITONER ×
Intelligent Key system INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×
Combination switch COMB SW ×
Body control system BCM ×
NVIS - NATS IMMU ×
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER ×
Back door open TRUNK ×
Vehicle security THEFT ALM × ×
RAP RETAINED PWR ×
Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × ×
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)

The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
DLK-46
CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description A

BATTERY VOLTAGE V Battery voltage of the moment a particular DTC is detected.
VEHICLE SPEED km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected.
EXTERNAL TEMP °C External temperature of the moment a particular DTC is detected
B
NOTE:
VEHICLE COND —
This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item.
C
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK STATUS —
POWER SUPPLY
min Displays the cumulative time from the time that the battery terminal is connected. D
COUNTER
DOOR LOCK
E
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) (Type 1) INFOID:0000000010434559
BCM CONSULT FUNCTION

CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. F
WORK SUPPORT
G
Monitor item Description
Anti-hijack function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET • On: Operate
H
• Off: Non-operation
Signature light function can be changed to operation with this mode
SIGNATURE LIGHT SETTING • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation I
DATA MONITOR
NOTE: J
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
Monitor Item Contents DLK

REQ SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
L
REQ SW-BD/TR Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side) M
DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
N
DOOR SW-BK Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch O
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
KEY CYL UN-SW

NOTE: P
DLK-47
Monitor Item Contents
Indicates [NOMAL/On/Off] condition of circuit between BCM and air bag diagnosis sensor unit
• NORMAL: Ignition switch ON. (BCM is receiving normal condition signal from air bag diagnosis sensor
SHOCK SENSOR unit.)
• ON: During the receiving of air bag signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit
• OFF: After the receiving of air bag signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit
NOTE:
KEY SW
ACTIVE TEST
Test item Description

This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
DOOR LOCK • The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check super lock actuator operation
SUPER LOCK • The all door lock actuators are set when “LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are released when “UNLOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check door lock status indicator operation
DOOR LOCK IND • On: Operate
INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 1)
INFOID:0000000010434560
WORK SUPPORT

INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis
Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this
mode
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
• On: Operate
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
ENGINE START BY I-KEY • On: Operate
NOTE:
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec
• MODE 3: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minutes
NOTE:
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
Ignition battery saver system mode can be changed to operation with this mode
IGN/ACC BATTERY SAVER • On: Operate
NOTE:
ANSWER BACK
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
Reminder function (door request switch) mode can be selected from the following with this
ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UN- mode
LOCK • On: hazard warning lamp operate
• Off: hazard warning lamp operate
DLK-48
A
Reminder function (Intelligent Key) mode can be selected from the following with this mode
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS LOCK
• On: hazard warning lamp operate
UNLOCK
NOTE: B
WELCOME LIGHT OP SET
This item is indicated, but not used
SELF-DIAG RESULT C
Refer to BCS-89, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
NOTE: D
E
Monitor Item Condition
REQ SW -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side) F
REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
G
CLUTCH SW*1 Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch interlock switch
BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off]*2 condition of stop lamp switch power supply

BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch H
DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
START CLUTCH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch pedal position switch
I
PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1
NEUTRAL SW - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of park/neutral position switch J
SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
STARTER RELAY - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter relay
ENGINE STATE Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states
DLK
Display the starter relay/starter control relay status signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communica-
ST/INHIRELAY-IPDM
tion
L
REVERSE SIGNAL - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of R position
CRANKING PERMIT - ECM Display the engine cranking permit signal from ECM via CAN communication
IS STATUS - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start system M
STARTER CUT RELAY - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay signal from ECM via CAN communication
VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h]
VEH SPEED 2 Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS or VDC or TCM by numerical value [Km/h]
N
IGN REQ - IPDM Display the ignition request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication
STARTER REQ - IPDM Display the starter request signal from IPDM E/R via CAN communication
O
DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of driver door status
DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger door status
DOOR STAT-RR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door RH status P
DOOR STAT-RL Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door LH status
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
ID OK FLAG Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of Intelligent Key ID
PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possible
DLK-49
NOTE:
PRMT RKE STRT
Indicates [KEY On/NOT On] condition of Intelligent Key ID and Intelligent Key is detected inside
I-KEY OK FLAG
vehicle
PRBT ENG STRT Indicates whether or not the engine is in start prohibited status
Indicates whether or not it is in engine start possible status when Intelligent Key verification is
ID AUTHENT CANCEL TIMER
unnecessary
ACC BATTERY SAVER Indicates [On/Off] whether or not ignition battery saver is in operation
Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in cranking prohibited status due to starter motor protection
CRNK PRBT TMR
function operation
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates [On/Off] whether or not in AUTO CRANKING MODE status
CRNK PRBT TME Indicates the time for changing from cranking prohibited status to cranking possible status
AUT CRANK TMR Indicates the time that AUTO CRANKING MODE operates
CRANKING TME Indicates the cranking operation time
NOTE:
SHORT CRANK
This item is displayed, but not used
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelli-
RKE OPE COUN1
gent Key, the numerical value start changing
NOTE:
RKE OPE COUN2
S/L IGN OFF POSITION Indicates [On/Off] condition of Ignition OFF signal
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 1 Indicates [Gnd/Off] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit
S/L SENSOR CIRCUIT 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit sensor circuit
S/L POWER OUTPUT Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
S/L POWER CHECK Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply
ANTICIPATED POWER Indicates [On/Off] condition of anticipated power supply
S/L LOCK REQ Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit lock request signal
S/L - BCM (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of CAN communication
S/L POWER ERROR Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit power supply error
VEH SPEED ERROR (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
VEH SPEED NORMAL (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
ENGINE RUNNING (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of engine running
S/L ID DISCORD Indicates [Correct/Incorrect] condition of ID verification
S/L ANTI-SCAN MODE Indicates [On/Off] condition of antiscan mode
S/L LOCK NOT PERMIT Indicates [Inhibition/No inhbt] condition of inhibit steering lock
S/L UNLOCK (CAN) Indicates [Finished/Unfinished] condition of steering lock unit unlock
S/L ID STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Coded/Blank] condition of registration ID
S/L RESET STATUS (CAN) Indicates [Exit/No exit] condition of steering lock unit reset signal
S/L LO-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of lo-level malfunction
S/L LOCK POSITION (CAN) Indicates [Armed/Malf/Unlocked/Undefined] condition of lock/unlock position signal
S/L ACT MALFUNCTION (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of steering lock unit malfunction
S/L HI-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of hi-level malfunction
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (SPD) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
S/L OPERATION PRHBT (PWR) Indicates [Allowed/Forbid] condition of safety line inhibition
S/L SENSOR POWER (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of sensor test power supply
S/L SEN TEST PERMIT (CAN) Indicates [Forbid/Authorize] condition of sensor test
S/L STAT NOT DETECT (CAN) Indicates [Ok/Undefind] condition of steering lock undefined position signal
DLK-50
A
S/L LOCKING FINISHED (CAN) Indicates [Unfinshd/Finished] condition of steering lock unit lock status signal
STOP/START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start off switch
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key B
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored C
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key D
NOTE:
RKE PBD
NOTE: E
KEY SW
NOTE:
IGN SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored F
NOTE:
START SW
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models. G

*2: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.
ACTIVE TEST H

This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation I
OUTSIDE BUZZER • On: Operate
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation
J
• Buzzer 1: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipi...) when CONSULT screen is touched
• Buzzer 2: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipi-pipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
INSIDE BUZZER touched
• Buzzer 3: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipipi-pipipipi-...) when CONSULT screen is DLK
touched
This test is able to check warning lamp operation
L
• KEY ON:[ Intelligent key system malfunction] displays when CONSULT screen is touched
INDICATOR
• KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation M
FLASHER
The hazard lamps are activated after “LH/RH/Off” on CONSULT screen is touched
NOTE:
HORN
This item is displayed, but cannot be used N
This test is able to operate the blower relay in fuse block (J/B)
IGN CONT2 • On: Operates
O
NOTE:
MIRROR +5
This test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation P
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
Push-ignition switch illumination illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check LOCK indicator in push-ignition switch operation
PUSH SWITCH INDICATOR
LOCK indicator in push-ignition switch illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
DLK-51
This test is able to check BCM sends starter request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communi-
cation
• MODE 1: IGN ON, START request OFF
ENGINE START REQUEST
• MODE 2: IGN OFF, START request ON
• MODE 3: IGN ON, START request ON
NOTE:
IGNITION RELAY
This test is able to operate the starter control relay
STARTER CUT RELAY • On: Operates
NOTE:
ENGINE START
This test is able to check back door opener actuator open operation
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
Back door opener actuator opens when “Open” on CONSULT screen is touched
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
NOTE:
REVERSE LAMP TEST
NOTE:
KEYFOB P/W TEST
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to audio unit or NAVI control unit
AUTO ACC 2 • On: Operate
NOTE:
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
This test is able to check BCM sends power supply to ignition relay
This test is able to check trunk room lamp operation
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) (Type 1) INFOID:0000000010434561
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch
STARTER CUT RELAY Indicates [On/Off] condition of starter control relay
NOTE:
DETECTION SENSOR (BK)
VEH SPEED 1 Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
DLK-52
A
BACK DOOR OEPENR SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
B
DLK
DLK-53
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [TYPE 1]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

BCM
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000010434562
ECU Reference
BCS-63, "Reference Value"
BCS-87, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-88, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-89, "DTC Index"
DLK-54
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [TYPE 1]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010434563
B
DLK
JRKWD0753GB
DLK-55
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3972GB
DLK-56
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3973GB
DLK-57
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3974GB
DLK-58
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3975GB
DLK-59
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3976GB
DLK-60
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3977GB
DLK-61
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3978GB
DLK-62
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3979GB
DLK-63
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3980GB
DLK-64
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3981GB
DLK-65
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3982GB
DLK-66
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [TYPE 1]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000010434564
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
DLK
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-67
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-68
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM A

1. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
2. Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC C
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.) D
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. E
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. F
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. G
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
H
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM I
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
J
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected DLK
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-88, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order. L
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
M
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". O
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step P
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CON-
SULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
DLK-69
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check according to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.
DLK-70
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010434565
B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C
CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description
• Inside key antenna (console)
D
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten- • Harness or connector
B2621–00 INSIDE ANTENNA
na (console) is sent to BCM [Inside key antenna (console) cir-
cuit is open or shorted]
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT. F
2. Select “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT
KEY”. G
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-71, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
NO >> Inside key antenna (console) is OK.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434566
I
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
J
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
DLK
DLK-71
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent Key is not in

the antenna detection area
JMMIA1652GB
116
When Intelligent Key is in the

antenna detection area
JMMIA1653GB
M69 Ground

JSMIA1348GB
117

JSMIA1406GB
Is the inspection result normal?

YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (console) harness connector.
BCM Inside key antenna (console)

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
116 2
M69 M73 Existed
117 1
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
116
M69 Not existed
117
DLK-72
YES >> GO TO 3. A
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
B
1. Replace inside key antenna (console). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. C
(+)
Signal D
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

the antenna detection area F
JMMIA1652GB
116 G

H
I
JMMIA1653GB
M69 Ground

DLK
JSMIA1348GB
117
L

M
JSMIA1406GB N
YES >> Replace inside key antenna (console).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". O
DLK-73
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT display
description
• Inside key antenna (luggage room)
na (luggage room) is sent to BCM [Inside key antenna (luggage
room) circuit is open or shorted]

1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
KEY”.
YES >> Refer to DLK-74, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Inside key antenna (luggage room) is OK.

DLK-74
(+) A
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
B
When Intelligent Key is not in the C

JMMIA1652GB
D
22 Ground
E
When Intelligent Key is in the an-
tenna detection area
F
JMMIA1653GB
B4
G
When Intelligent Key is not in the

antenna detection area H
JSMIA1507GB
23 Ground I
J
DLK
JSMIA1506GB

YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". L
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT M
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) harness con-
nector. N
BCM Inside key antenna (luggage room)

Continuity O
22 2
B4 B53 Existed
23 1
P
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
22
B4 Not existed
23
DLK-75

YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace inside key antenna (luggage room). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

JMMIA1652GB
22 Ground

JMMIA1653GB
B4

JSMIA1507GB
23 Ground

JSMIA1506GB

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (luggage room).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation".
DLK-76
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010479513
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
2. Select “TRUNK/BACK DOOR” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C
Monitor item Status

TRUNK/BACK DOOR OPEN Back door OPEN D
YES >> Back door opener actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-77, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
F
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect back door lock assembly connector. G
3. Check voltage between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.
(+)
H
Back door lock assembly (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
B2 1 Ground
Back door
ON 9 - 16 V
I
opener switch
YES >> GO TO 3. J
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
DLK
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock assembly harness connector.
BCM Back door lock assembly L

Continuity
B3 121 B2 1 Existed
M
BCM N
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B3 121 Not existed
O
NO >> Repair or replace harness. P
3.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.
DLK-77
Back door lock assembly

Continuity
B2 2 Existed
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Replace back door lock assembly.
DLK-78
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “TRUNK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “BACK DOOR OPENER SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Monitor item Condition Status

Pressed ON D
BACK DOOR OPENER SW Back door opener switch
Released OFF
E
YES >> Back door opener switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-79, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect back door opener switch assembly connector.
3. Check signal between back door opener switch assembly harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
Back door opener switch assembly (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal I
D94 1 Ground 9 - 16 V
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH CIRCUIT DLK
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door opener switch assembly harness con-
nector. L
BCM Back door opener switch assembly

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
B4 16 D94 1 Existed
N
BCM
Continuity
B4 16 Not existed O

YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". P
3.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door opener switch assembly harness connector and ground.
DLK-79
Back door opener switch assembly

Continuity
D94 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
Refer to DLK-80, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace back door opener switch assembly.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010479517

3. Check continuity between back door opener switch assembly terminals.

Condition Continuity
Terminal
Back door opener Pressed Existed

1 4
switch Released Not existed
YES >> INSPECTION END
DLK-80
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
2. Select “REQ SW-BD/TR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Pressed On D
REQ SW-BD/TR Back door request switch
Released Off
E
YES >> Back door request switch is OK.
F
1.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

3. Check voltage between back door opener switch assembly harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
D94 2 Ground 9 - 16 V
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT DLK
nector. L

Continuity
B4 6 D94 2 Existed
N
BCM
Continuity
B4 6 Not existed O

NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
DLK-81

Continuity
D94 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



Terminal
Pressed Existed
2 3 Back door request switch
Released Not existed
DLK-82
COMBINATION METER BUZZER
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
2. Select “INSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “Buzzer 1”, “Buzzer 2” or “Buzzer 3” to check that it works normally. C
Yes >> Buzzer (combination meter) is OK.
No >> Refer to DLK-83, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
1.CHECK METER BUZZER CIRCUIT E
Refer to WCS-44, "Component Function Check".

Is the inspection result normal? F
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
H
>> INSPECTION END
DLK
DLK-83
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010434582
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK Door lock actuators
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-84, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434583
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front door lock assembly
(–) Condition Voltage
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
D26 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V
3 Lock
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)

Continuity
141 3
M68 D26 Existed
148 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
141
M68 Not existed
148
YES >> GO TO 3.
D L K -8 4
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL A

1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
B
(+)
BCM (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal C
141 Lock
M68 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V
148 Unlock
D
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
E
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010434584
F
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. G
Monitor item Status H

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
I
J
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434585
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL DLK

2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (passenger side) harness connector and ground. L
(+)
(–) Condition Voltage M
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock N
3 Lock
O
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (passenger side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT P
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (passenger side) har-
ness connector.
DLK-85
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM Front door lock assembly (passenger side)

Continuity
139 2
M68 D2 Existed
141 3
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M68 Not existed
141
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
(+)
Connector Terminal
139 Unlock
141 Lock
REAR LH
REAR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010434586
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434587

2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly LH harness connector and ground.
DLK-86
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+) A
Rear door lock assembly LH (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
B
3 Lock
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT D
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly LH harness connector.
E
BCM Rear door lock assembly LH
Continuity
124 2
F
B3 D52 Existed
125 3
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. G
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal H
Ground
124
B3 Not existed
125
I
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. DLK
(+)
BCM (–) Condition Voltage L
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
B3 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V M
125 Lock
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator. N
REAR RH
REAR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000010434588
O
1.CHECK FUNCTION
P
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
DLK-87
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434589

2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear door lock assembly RH (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly RH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly RH harness connector.
BCM Rear door lock assembly RH

Continuity
124 2
B3 D65 Existed
125 3
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
B3 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V
125 Lock
DLK-88
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C
Monitor item Condition Status D

Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Door lock and unlock switch E
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch is OK.
G
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL H

2. Disconnect power window main switch connector.
3. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
I
(+)
Power window main switch (–) Voltage
J
Connector Terminal
3
D30 Ground 9 - 16 V
15 DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front power window switch (passenger side) connector. M
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
BCM Power window main switch

Continuity N
50 3
M70 D30 Existed
80 15 O
BCM P
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed
80
DLK-89

YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-68, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH :
Removal and Installation".
NO >> INSPECTION END
PASSENGER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON
NO >> Refer to DLK-90, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
3. Check signal between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front power window switch (passenger side) (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
1
D7 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and power window main switch connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) har-
ness connector.
BCM Front power window switch (passenger side)

Continuity
50 1
M70 D7 Existed
80 2
DLK-90
BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed B
80
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". C
Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". D
YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-68, "FRONT POWER WIN-
DOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Removal and Installation". E
DLK
DLK-91
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR LOCK IND” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Monitor item Status

ON Turns ON
DOOR LOCK IND Door lock status indicator
OFF Turns OFF
YES >> Door lock status indicator is OK.
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR INPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect indicator unit connector.
3. Check voltage between indicator unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Indicator unit (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M4 5 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> Replace indicator unit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and indicator unit harness connector.
BCM Indicator unit

Continuity
M69 111 M4 5 Existed
BCM
Continuity
M69 111 Not existed
DLK-92
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
2. Select “REQ SW-DR”, “REQ SW-AS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Pressed ON D
REQ SW -DR Driver side door request switch
Released OFF
Pressed ON
REQ SW -AS Passenger side door request switch E
Released OFF
YES >> Front door request switch is OK. F
G
1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector. H
3. Check voltage between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
(+) I
Front door request switch (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
J
Driver side D39
3 Ground 9 – 16 V
Passenger side D9
Is the inspection result normal? DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT L
2. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and BCM harness
connector. M
Front door request switch BCM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal N
Driver side D39 105
3 M69 Existed
Passenger side D9 82
O
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
Front door request switch

Continuity P
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D39
3 Not existed
Passenger side D9
DLK-93
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D39
4 Existed
Passenger side D9
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning front door request switch.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector.
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch terminals.

Terminal
Pressed Existed
3 4 Door request switch
DLK-94
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
2. Select “DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”, “DOOR SW-RL”, “DOOR SW-RR”, “DOOR SW-BK” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode. C

D
Open On
DOOR SW-DR Driver side door
Closed Off
Open On E
DOOR SW-AS Passenger side door
Closed Off
Open On
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH F
Closed Off
Open On
DOOR SW-RR Rear door RH
Closed Off G
Open On
DOOR SW-BK Back door
Closed Off
H
YES >> Door switch is OK.
I
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL J

2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check signal between malfunctioning door switch harness connector and ground. DLK
(+)
Door switch (–) Voltage L
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92
M
Passenger side B55
Rear LH B56 3 Ground 9 - 16 V
Rear RH B93 N
Back door B2
O
YES-1 >> Back door: GO TO 3.
YES-2 >> Other door: GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT P

2. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
DLK-95
DOOR SWITCH
Door switch BCM

Continuity
Driver side B92 17
Passenger side B55 13
Rear LH B56 3 B4 12 Existed
Rear RH B93 10
Back door B2 11
3. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and ground.
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92
Passenger side B55 Ground
Rear LH B56 3 Not existed
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
3.CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT

Continuity
B2 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

3. Check continuity between door switch terminals.
DLK-96
DOOR SWITCH
Door switch A
Terminal
Pressed Existed
Driver side B
Pressed Existed
Passenger side
Ground part of door Released Not existed C
3 Door switch
switch Pressed Existed
Rear LH
Pressed Existed D
Rear RH
Back door lock as- Lock Existed

Back door 3 4 E
sembly Unlock Not existed
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Replace malfunction door switch.
DLK
DLK-97
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “FLASHER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Monitor item Status

LH Front turn signal lamp LH Turns ON
FLASHER RH Front turn signal lamp RH Turns ON
OFF Front turn signal lamp Turns OFF
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
1.CHECK HAZARD OPERATION

Refer to EXL-26, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (LED
headlamp models) or EXL-195, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion" (halogen headlamp models).
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EXL-146, "Symptom Table" (LED headlamp models) and EXL-303, "Symptom Table"
(halogen headlamp models).
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-98
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
A
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY B

Check by connecting a resistance (approximately 300 Ω) so that the
current value becomes about 10 mA. Refer to DLK-197, "Removal
and Installation". C
Standard : Approx. 2.5 - 3.0 V

Is the measurement value within the specification? D
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery.
E
OCC0607D
DLK
DLK-99
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “OUTSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Monitor item Status

ON Buzzer sounds
OUTSIDE BUZZER Outside warning buzzer
OFF Buzzer does not sound
YES >> Intelligent Key warning buzzer is OK.
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer connector.
3. Check voltage between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
(+)
Intelligent Key warning buzzer (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
Operate Intelligent Key
E7 1 Ground 9 – 16 V
buzzer
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector.
BCM Intelligent Key warning buzzer

Continuity
E60 164 E7 1 Existed
BCM
Continuity
E60 164 Not existed
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.
DLK-100
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
Monitor item Status

ON Buzzer sounds D
E
F

H
(+)
buzzer
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER CIRCUIT DLK

2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector. L
Continuity
M
N
BCM
Continuity
E60 164 Not existed O
P
DLK-101
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent Key

is not in the antenna
detection area
When ignition switch JSMIA1348GB

100 Ground and any door switch is
ON

is in the antenna de-
tection area
JSMIA1406GB
M69

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (driver side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (driver side) harness connec-
tor.
DLK-102
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. C
(+)
BCM (–) Condition
Signal D
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

F
detection area

100 Ground and any door switch is G
ON
When Intelligent Key H

tection area
I
JSMIA1406GB
M69
J
detection area DLK

L
ON

is in the antenna de- M
tection area
JSMIA1506GB
N
O
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (driver side) connector. P
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (driver side) harness connec-
tor.
DLK-103
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
YES >> Replace outside handle grip RH.
PASSENGER SIDE

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB
M69

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) harness
connector.
DLK-104
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". A
PASSENGER SIDE
B

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
(+)
Signal
D
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E

is not in the antenna F
detection area
When ignition switch JSMIA1507GB G

ON
H
tection area
I
JSMIA1506GB
M69
J

detection area DLK

119 Ground and any door switch is L
ON
When Intelligent Key M

tection area
N
JSMIA1506GB

YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". O
NO >> GO TO 2.
P
1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) harness
connector.
DLK-105
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
YES >> Replace outside handle grip LH.
REAR BUMPER
REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434576

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area
JMMIA1652GB
21

tection area
When ignition switch JMMIA1653GB

B4 Ground and any door switch is
ON

detection area
JSMIA1507GB
24

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) harness con-
nector.
DLK-106
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
REAR BUMPER
B

(+)
Signal
D
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E

is not in the antenna F
detection area
JMMIA1652GB G
21
H
tection area
I
ON
J

detection area DLK
JSMIA1507GB
24 L
When Intelligent Key M

tection area
N
JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
P
1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
nector.
DLK-107
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
BCM Outside key antenna (rear bumper)

Continuity
21 2
B4 B52 Existed
24 1
BCM
Connector Terminal Continuity
Ground
21
B4 Not existed
24
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area
JMMIA1652GB
21

tection area

ON

detection area
JSMIA1507GB
24

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

DLK-108
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
YES >> Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper).
DLK
DLK-109
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010479727
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuse is not fusing.
Signal name Fuse No.

Front door lock actuator power supply 29 (15 A)
Is the fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connectors.
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M68 143 Ground 9 – 16 V
Is the measurement value normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M68 Existed
147
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010479728
1.CHECK FUSE

Passenger door and rear door lock actuator power supply 31 (15 A)
Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-110
A
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal B
M68 151 Ground 9 – 16 V
Is the measurement value normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT D
BCM E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M68 Existed F
147
YES >> INSPECTION END G
DLK
DLK-111
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “SUPER LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Touch “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” to check that it works normally.
YES >> Super lock actuator is OK.
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL

(+)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
1 Set
D26 Ground Super lock 9 – 16 V
2 Release
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM and each door lock assembly.
connector.

Continuity
148 2
M68 D26 Existed
149 1
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
148
M68 Not existed
149

YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-112
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
(+) A
Connector Terminal
148 Release
B
M68 Ground Super lock 9 – 16 V
149 Set
PASSENGER SIDE D
1.CHECK FUNCTION E

F
YES >> Super lock actuator is OK. G
H
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector. I
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
(+) J
Front door lock assembly (passenger side) (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
1 Set DLK
2 Release
Is the inspection result normal? L
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT M
ness connector. N

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
139 2
M68 D2 Existed
149 1
P
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M68 Not existed
149
DLK-113
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
139 Release
149 Set
REAR LH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
NO >> Refer to DLK-114, "REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH.
(+)
Connector Terminal
1 Set
2 Release
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM, each door lock actuator and fuel filler lid lock actuator connector.

Continuity
124 2
B3 D52 Existed
131 1
DLK-114
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed B
131

C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL D
E
(+)
Connector Terminal F
124 Release
B3 Ground Super lock 9 – 16 V
131 Set
G
H
REAR RH
I
1.CHECK FUNCTION
J
DLK
NO >> Refer to DLK-115, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010479726 L
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH.
N
(+)
Connector Terminal O
1 Set
2 Release
P
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-115
UNLOCK SENSOR
UNLOCK SENSOR

3. Check signal between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
D26 4 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT
connector.

Continuity
M69 104 D26 4 Existed
BCM
Continuity
M69 104 Not existed
3.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
Front door lock assembly (driver side)

Continuity
D26 5 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
DLK-116
UNLOCK SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END
A
1.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR B

3. Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) terminals.
C
Terminal
D
Unlock Existed
4 5 Driver side door
Lock Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? E
NO >> Replace front lock assembly (driver side).
F
DLK
DLK-117
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [TYPE 1]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
ALL DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000010434632
All doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434633
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check front door lock and unlock power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to DLK-109, "FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure" (front door) or DLK-109, "REAR DOOR : Diagnosis
Procedure" (rear door).
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
Check door lock and unlock switch.
Refer to DLK-88, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check" (driver side) or DLK-89, "PASSENGER SIDE
: Component Function Check" (passenger side).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-83, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-94, "Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-132, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000010479882
Front doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

DLK-118
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SWITCH
B
ALL DOOR
C
D
Check front door lock and unlock power supply and ground circuit. E
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH G
: Component Function Check" (passenger side). H
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. I
J
YES >> GO TO 4. DLK
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch. L
YES >> GO TO 5. M
5.REPLACE BCM
N
O
FRONT DOOR P

DLK-119
Refer to DLK-110, "FRONT DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check front door lock actuator (driver side).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000010479884
Rear doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

Check rear doors lock and unlock power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to DLK-110, "REAR DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check rear door lock actuator.
Refer to DLK-86, "REAR LH : Component Function Check" (LH) and DLK-87, "REAR RH :
Component Function Check" (RH).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000010434634
Driver side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

DLK-120
Refer to DLK-84, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". A
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. B
2.REPLACE BCM
C
YES >> INSPECTION END D
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000010434636
E
Passenger side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
F

G
Check front door lock assembly (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-85, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM I
Is the result normal? J
REAR LH DLK
REAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000010434638
L
Rear LH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
M
Check rear door lock assembly LH.
Refer to DLK-86, "REAR LH : Component Function Check". N
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. O
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". P
REAR RH
DLK-121
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK
KNOB OR DOOR KEY CYLINDER
1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION

Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to DLK-118, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
Check unlock sensor.
Refer to DLK-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-122
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description INFOID:0000000010434645
B
All doors do not lock/unlock using all door request switches.
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434646
C
1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
Check remote keyless entry function. D
Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent Key button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
2. Select “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. F
3. Check “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA H
Check inside key antenna.

• Console: Refer to DLK-70, "DTC Logic".
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-73, "DTC Logic". I
YES >> GO TO 4.
J
4.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna. DLK
• Driver side: Refer to DLK-102, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Passenger side: Refer to DLK-104, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-106, "REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure". L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. M
5.REPLACE BCM
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. N
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". O
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010434647 P
All doors do not lock/unlock using driver side door request switch.
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434648
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Check driver side door request switch.
DLK-123


Check remote keyless entry function.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Select “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-74, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check outside key antenna.
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-107, "REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010434647

DLK-124
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA B
Check outside key antenna (driver side).

Refer to DLK-103, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
C
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. D
3.REPLACE BCM
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. E
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". F
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010434649 G
All doors do not lock/unlock using passenger side door request switch.
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434650 H
1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Check passenger side door request switch. I
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DLK
Check outside key antenna (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-105, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM M
Is the result normal? N
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH O
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010434651
P
All doors do not lock/unlock using back door request switch.
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010434652

Check back door request switch.
DLK-125
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check outside key antenna (rear bumper).
Refer to DLK-107, "REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-126
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
A
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY B

For Intelligent Key that cannot be used for door lock and unlock, check that the Intelligent Key belongs to the
vehicle to be checked.
Does the Intelligent Key belong to the vehicle to checked? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check Intelligent Key button operation with registered Intelligent Key belonging to the vehicle.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING D
Check that the Intelligent Key low battery warning is operated.

Is the Intelligent Key low battery warning operated? E
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 >> With another registered Intelligent Key: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without another registered Intelligent Key: GO TO 4. F
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BUTTON OPERATION
Check that door lock and unlock can be performed by operating the buttons of another registered Intelligent
Key. G
Can door lock and unlock be performed with another registered Intelligent Key?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 7. H
4.CHECK ENGINE START
While depressing the brake pedal, contact the backside of the Intelligent Key that cannot be used to perform I
door lock and unlock operation to the push-button ignition switch. Operate the push-button ignition switch, and
check that the vehicle is in START status.
Is the vehicle in START status? J
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY DLK
Check the inside of the Intelligent Key for rust or corrosion by water. Simultaneously check the internal circuits
for damage.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key.
6.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY M
Check the Intelligent Key battery.

N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery. O
Check door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
Does door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch? P
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Refer to DLK-119, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
8.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
DLK-127
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.REPLACE INTELLIGENT KEY
1. Replace Intelligent Key.
DLK-128
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED
A
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH B

Check back door opener switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR D
Check back door opener actuator.

Refer to DLK-77, "Component Function Check". E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. F
3.REPLACE BCM
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. G
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". H
DLK
DLK-129
SUPER LOCK DOES NOT OPERATE
ALL DOOR
All super lock do not operate.


Check driver door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
Does driver door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check driver door super lock actuator.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
Driver side super lock does not operate.

1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

Check driver side super lock actuator.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE
Passenger side super lock does not operate.
DLK-130
A
Check passenger side super lock actuator.
Refer to DLK-113, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". B
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. C
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". D
YES >> INSPECTION END E
REAR LH
F
Rear LH side super lock does not operate.

G
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR H

Check super lock actuator rear LH.
Refer to DLK-114, "REAR LH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM J

DLK
L
REAR RH
REAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000010479936
M
Passenger side super lock does not operate.
N
Check super lock actuator rear RH.
O
Refer to DLK-115, "REAR RH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2. P
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-131
DLK-132
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK “DOOR LOCK–UNLOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B

2. Select “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” C
YES >> GO TO 2 D
NO >> Set “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.REPLACE BCM
E
F
DLK
DLK-133
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

2. Select “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “AUTO LOCK SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-134
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER B

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter.
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-90, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to MWI-39, "DTC Index". (Combination meter)
2.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION D
Check hazard function.

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-135
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-136
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
A
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR B

Check door lock status indicator.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> GO TO 1. F
DLK
DLK-137
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE OR PASSENGER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check driver side or passenger side door switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-138
ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK P POSITION WARNING OPERATION B

Check P position warning operation.
Refer to DLK-41, "WARNING FUNCTION : System Description".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

DLK
DLK-139
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch (driver side).
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER
Check combination meter buzzer.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE BCM
DLK-140
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM, TCM AND COMBINATION METER B

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM, TCM and combination meter.
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER D

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
Refer to DLK-100, "Component Function Check". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. H
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch (driver side). I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
Check inside key antenna. DLK
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INFORMATION DISPLAY M
Check information display.

N
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. P
DLK-141
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM, TCM AND COMBINATION METER

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INFORMATION DISPLAY
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
DLK-142
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INFORMATION DISPLAY D

Refer to DLK-99, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
Check Intelligent Key battery.
Refer to DLK-100, "Component Inspection". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check inside key antenna. I
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM DLK
Is the result normal? L
M
DLK-143
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident"
DLK-144
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of H
the customer's comments; refer to DLK-149, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to dupli-
cate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). I
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by a test drive with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
DLK
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand) N
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise) O
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz – (Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that a technician P
may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.
DLK-145
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Engine ear or mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• Removing the components in the area that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem-
porarily.
• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is are suspected to be the cause of the
noise.
• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
• Looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to DLK-147, "Inspection Procedure".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
- separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. These insulators are available through the authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
• INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
• INSULATOR (Light foam block)
• FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
The following materials, not available through NISSAN Parts Department, can also be used to repair
squeaks and rattles.
• UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
• SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that is be visible or does not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
• SILICONE SPRAY
Used when grease cannot be applied.
• DUCT TAPE
Used to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
DLK-146
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000010434674
A
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: B
1. Cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
C
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins D
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by E
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by apply-
ing felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring har-
ness.
F
CAUTION:
Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, the recheck
of repair becomes impossible.
G
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher H
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. I
DOORS
Pay attention to the following:
J
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
DLK
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to L
repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer. M
In addition look for following:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment N
3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus- O
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: P
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
DLK-147
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
when the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
DLK-148
Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000010434675
DLK
PIIB8740E
P
DLK-149
PIIB8742E
DLK-150
HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [TYPE 1]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

HOOD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000010434676
B
DLK
N
JMKIB3292ZZ
1. Hood assembly 2. Hood front seal 3. Hood insulator

O
4. Hood rod grommet 5. Hood support rod 6. Hood rod clamp
7. Hood bumper rubber 8. Hood hinge 9. Radiator core seal
10. Hood bumper rubber
P
: Clip
: Pawl
: Body grease
, : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
HOOD ASSEMBLY
DLK-151
HOOD
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434677
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation.
REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported with appropriate material when removing
hood assembly.
2. Remove hood hinge mounting nuts, and then remove hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply touch-up paint to the body color if the paint around the hinge is peeled off during removal.
• After installing, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-152, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• Before installation of hood, apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface of the hood hinge.
• Check hood hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-155, "HOOD HINGE : Inspection".
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000010434678
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-152
HOOD
DLK
L
JMKIB4355GB
1. Hood assembly 2. Front combination lamp 3. Front fender assembly M

4. Hood bumper rubber 5. Hood hinge 6. Hood lock assembly
: Vehicle front
N
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
:Body grease
O
Fitting Adjustment Standard
Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below. P
DLK-153
HOOD
HOOD HINGE : Inspection INFOID:0000000010434680
Check hood hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease if necessary.
: Body grease
JMKIB2933ZZ
HOOD SUPPORT ROD

HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434681
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Two workers are required to support the hood.
1. Support hood assembly with a suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
hood assembly.
2. Remove hood support rod from hood rod grommet.
3. Remove hood rod grommet from hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
HOOD INSULATOR
HOOD INSULATOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434682
REMOVAL
1. Fully open hood assembly.
2. Remove hood rod clamp from hood assembly.
3. Remove hood insulator clips, and then remove hood insulator.
INSTALLATION
DLK-154
HOOD
A
B
: Body grease
D
JMKIB2933ZZ
HOOD SUPPORT ROD

E
REMOVAL F
CAUTION:
1. Support hood assembly with a suitable material to prevent it from falling. G
WARNING:
hood assembly. H
INSTALLATION I
HOOD INSULATOR
J
REMOVAL DLK
L
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. M
DLK-155
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
HRA2DDT
HRA2DDT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010434683
JMKIB3298GB
1. Radiator core support upper 2. Air guide RH 3. Air lower guide

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
HRA2DDT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434684
REMOVAL
1. Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-26, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-24, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood switch.
a. Disconnect hood switch harness connector.
b. Remove hood switch mounting bolt, and then remove hood switch.
4. Remove hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-179, "HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips from radiator core support upper. Refer to DLK-179,
"Exploded View".
6. Remove engine room harness fixing clips from radiator core support upper.
7. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-24, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove horn. Refer to HRN-7, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove radiator mounting bracket. Refer to CO-18, "Exploded View".
10. Remove A/C pipe bracket mounting bolt. Refer to HA-33, "Exploded View".
11. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support upper.
INSTALLATION
DLK-156
MR16DDT A
MR16DDT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000011733745
JMKIB3299GB
J
4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) DLK
MR16DDT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000011733746
L
REMOVAL
2. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-149, "Removal and Installation". M
b. Remove hood switch mounting bolt, and then remove hood switch. N
O
"Exploded View".
P
DLK-157
10. Remove A/C pipe bracket mounting bolt (1).
E1BIA1725ZZ
INSTALLATION
K9K
K9K : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010434685
JMKIB3298GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
K9K : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434686
REMOVAL
DLK-158
4. Remove hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-179, "HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation". A
"Exploded View".
6. Remove engine room harness fixing clips from radiator core support upper. B
C
11. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support upper. D
INSTALLATION
R9M E
R9M : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010434687
F
T/M models
DLK
JMKIB3299GB
N
4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) O
DLK-159
CVT models
JMKIB3300GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
R9M : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434688
REMOVAL
"Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
DLK-160
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
A
I
JMKIB3315GB
1. Front fender seal 2. Front fender assembly 3. Hoodledge cover J

: Pawl
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

DLK
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434690
CAUTION: L
Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation.
REMOVAL
M
1. Remove fillet molding. Refer to EXT-38, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-33, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front bumper fascia assembly and bumper side bracket. Refer to EXT-20, "Removal and Installa-
N
tion".
4. Remove front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-319, "Removal and Installation" (HALOGEN HEADLAMP)
or EXL-162, "Removal and Installation" (LED HEADLAMP).
O
5. Remove front fender seal.
6. Remove front fender assembly mounting bolts.
P
DLK-161
FRONT FENDER
7. Remove front fender stiffener (2) from the vehicle body while
carefully pulling upper portion of front fender (1) toward vehicle
outside.
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5633ZZ
8. Remove front fender assembly.

CAUTION:
An viscous urethane foam is installed on the back surface of front fender. When removing the
front fender, be careful to not deform the front fender while performing the procedure and remov-
ing the viscous urethane foam a little at a time.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of front fender mounting
bolts.
• After installation, adjust the following part.
- Hood assembly: Refer to DLK-152, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
- Front door: Refer to DLK-164, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
DLK-162
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
A
I
JMKIB3247GB
1. Front door panel 2. Door hinge (upper) 3. Door hinge (lower) J

4. Door check link 5. Bumper rubber 6. Door striker
7. TORX bolt 8. Grommet
: Always replace after every disassembly. DLK
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) L

: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY M
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434693
CAUTION: N
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body. O
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door harness grommet from vehicle body side, and then pull out front door harness.
P
2. Disconnect front door harness connector.
3. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on the vehicle body.
4. Remove door hinge mounting nuts of door side, and then remove door assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-163
FRONT DOOR
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-164, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.
• Check door hinge and door check link rotating part for poor lubrication.
- Door hinge: Refer to DLK-166, "DOOR HINGE : Inspection".
- Door check link: Refer to DLK-166, "DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation".
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000010434694
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
JMKIB3256GB
1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door

4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door hinge (upper) 9. Rear door hinge (lower)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
DLK-164
FRONT DOOR
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

A
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visually and touching. B
shown below.
Unit: mm [in] C
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
H Clearance D
[0.130 – 0.209]
Front fender – Front door A–A
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
I
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Front door – Rear door B–B
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0) F
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
Fitting Adjustment Procedure G

1. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-161, "Removal and Installation".
2. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
3. Adjust the surface height of front door according to the fitting standard dimension. H
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
5. Loosen door hinge mounting bolts on vehicle body side.
6. Raise front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard dimen- I
sion.
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION: J
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply body grease if necessary. Refer to DLK
DLK-166, "DOOR HINGE : Inspection".
8. Install front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-161, "Removal and Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT L
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction.
DOOR STRIKER
M
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434695
REMOVAL N
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. O
CAUTION:
• Never reuse mounting TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. P
ment".
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434696
REMOVAL
DLK-165
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
2. Remove front door assembly. Refer to DLK-163, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front door hinge mounting bolts (body side), and then remove front door hinge.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
ment".
• After installation, check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-166, "DOOR
HINGE : Inspection".
DOOR HINGE : Inspection INFOID:0000000010434697
Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply body
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
DOOR CHECK LINK

DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434698
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door glass.
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "FRONT DOOR FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front door speaker.
a. Disconnect front door speaker harness connector.
b. Remove front door speaker mounting bolts, and then remove front door speaker.
4. Remove check link mounting bolts of vehicle body side.
5. Remove check link mounting bolts of door side.
6. Take door check link out from the hole of door panel.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check front door open/close operation after installation.
• After installation, check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-167, "DOOR
CHECK LINK : Inspection".
DLK-166
FRONT DOOR
DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection INFOID:0000000010434699
A
B
: Body grease
D
JMKIB0322ZZ
DLK
DLK-167
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
JMKIB3249GB
1. Rear door panel 2. Door hinge (upper) 3. Door hinge (lower)

4. Door check link 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Grommet
: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door harness grommet from vehicle body side, and then pull out rear door harness.
2. Disconnect rear door harness connector.
3. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on the vehicle.
4. Remove door hinge mounting nuts of door side, and then remove rear door assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-168
REAR DOOR
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-169, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust- A
ment".
B
- Door check link: Refer to DLK-172, "DOOR CHECK LINK : Inspection".
C
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
D
DLK
JMKIB3256GB
P
DLK-169
REAR DOOR
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between rear door and each part by visually and touching.
shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.5 – 5.5
L Clearance
[0.138 – 0.217]
Rear door – Body side panel C–C
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
M
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
Fitting Adjustment Procedure

1. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and Installation".
3. Adjust the surface height of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension.
5. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts and bolts on body side.
6. Raise rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension.
CAUTION:
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-166, "DOOR HINGE : Inspec-
tion".
8. Install center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-169, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
DLK-170
REAR DOOR
tect door and body. A
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door assembly. Refer to DLK-168, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
B
2. Remove door hinge mounting bolts of vehicle body side, and then remove door hinge (lower).
4. Remove door hinge mounting nuts of vehicle body side, and then remove door hinge (upper). C
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: D
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-164, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust- E
ment".
HINGE : Inspection". F
Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply body grease if necessary. G
• Door hinge (upper)
: Body grease H
J
JMKIB0329ZZ
• Door hinge (lower) DLK
: Body grease
L
JMKIB0321ZZ N
DOOR CHECK LINK

O
REMOVAL P
1. Fully close the rear door glass.
2. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "REAR DOOR FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove rear door speaker.
a. Disconnect rear door speaker harness connector.
b. Remove rear door speaker mounting bolts, and then remove rear door speaker.
DLK-171
REAR DOOR
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
DLK-172
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
A
DLK
L
JMKIB3637GB
1. Back door hinge 2. Stud ball 3. Back door stay M

4. Back door weather-strip 5. Stud ball 6. Back door bumper rubber
7. Back door striker 8. TORX bolt 9. Back door panel
A. Center mark N
B. Seam
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) O
: Body grease
, , , : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle. P
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434711
CAUTION:
DLK-173
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door trim finisher lower and back door trim finisher upper. Refer to INT-31, "Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove rear washer tube from back door panel. Refer to WW-90, "WASHER TUBE : Removal and Instal-
lation".
3. Disconnect back door harness connectors from body harness connectors.
4. Remove harness grommet from back door panel.
5. Pull out body harness LH from back door panel.
6. Support back door with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the back door open when removing the
back door stay.
7. Remove back door stay of back door side. Refer to DLK-177, "BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installa-
tion".
8. Remove back door mounting nuts, and then remove back door assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-174, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
• Apply touch-up paint to the body color if the paint around back door hinge is peeled off.
• Check back door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-177, "BACK DOOR HINGE :
Inspection".
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000010434712
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-174
BACK DOOR
DLK
L
JMKIB3321GB
1. Roof panel 2. Body side outer 3. Rear bumper fascia M

4. Back door panel 5. Back door hinge 6. Back door bumper rubber
7. Back door striker 8. TORX bolt
: Always replace after every disassembly. N
: Body grease O

Check the clearance and the surface height between back door and each part by seeing and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures P
shown below.
DLK-175
BACK DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
Portion Standard
(RH/LH,MAX)
5.0 – 7.0
D Clearance —
[0.197 – 0.276]
Back door – Roof panel A–A
Surface 0 – 2.0
E —
height [0 – 0.079]
2.8 – 7.2 < 2.9
F Clearance
[0.110 – 0.283] [0.114]
Back door – Body side outer B–B
Surface 0 – 4.0 < 2.5
G
height [0 – 0.157] [0.098]
4.8 – 9.2
Back door – Rear bumper fascia C–C H Clearance —
[0.189 – 0.362]

1. Loosen back door striker mounting TORX bolts.
2. Loosen back door hinge mounting nuts (back door side).
3. Adjust back door using back door striker, back door hinge and back door bumper rubber to the specified
value, as shown in the following table.
4. After adjustment tighten back door striker mounting bolts and back door hinge mounting nuts (back door
side) to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Apply touch-up paint to the body color if the paint around back door hinge, and back door hinge
mounting nuts is peeled off.
Inspection".
BACK DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust back door striker so that it becomes parallel with back door lock insertion direction.
BACK DOOR STRIKER
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434713
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage rear plate. Refer to INT-30, "Luggage floor trim".
2. Remove TORX bolts, and then remove back door striker.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
BACK DOOR HINGE
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434714
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door assembly. Refer to DLK-173, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove luggage side upper finisher LH and RH. Refer to INT-29, "Luggage side trim".
3. Lower the rear end of headlining to secure work space.
4. Remove back door hinge mounting nut, and then remove back door hinge.
INSTALLATION
DLK-176
BACK DOOR
CAUTION: A
Inspection".
B
Adjustment".
BACK DOOR HINGE : Inspection INFOID:0000000010434715
C
D
: Body grease
JMKIB0628ZZ
BACK DOOR STAY G
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434716
H
REMOVAL
1. Support the back door with the suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING: I
back door stay.
CAUTION:
Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation. J
2. Remove back door stay of vehicle body side.
a. Remove the metal clip (3) located on the connection between
DLK
the back door stay (1) and the stud ball (2) by using a remover
tool (A) according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by
arrows as shown in the figure.
L
JMKIA2255ZZ
N
b. Disengage back door stay from stud ball.
3. Remove back door stay mounting bolts of back door side, and then remove back door stay.
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
P
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal INFOID:0000000010434717
CAUTION:
When performing disposal operation, wear the protective glasses and protective gloves.
DLK-177
BACK DOOR
1. Fix back door stay (1) using a vise (C)
CAUTION:
When cutting a hole on back door stay, always cover a
hacksaw (A) using a shop cloth (B) to avoid scattering
metal fragments or oil.
JMKIA3336ZZ
2. Slowly cut a hole and drain the gas in the order of 1→2 as
shown in the figure using a hacksaw at 2 positions of (1) and (2).
A : 20 mm (0.787 in)
B : Cat at the groove
JMKIA3609ZZ
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP

BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434718
REMOVAL
Pull up and remove engagement with body from weather-strip joint.
CAUTION:
Never pull strongly on weather-strip.
INSTALLATION
1. Working from the upper section, align weather-strip center mark with vehicle center position mark and
install weather-strip onto the vehicle.
2. For the lower section, align the weather-strip seam with center of back door striker.
3. Pull weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section.
CAUTION:
Securely fit each corner.
DLK-178
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
A
J
JMKIB3308GB
1. Hood lock control handle 2. Hood lock control cable 3. Hood safety hook DLK
4. Hood lock assembly
: Clip
L

M
: Body grease
HOOD LOCK
N
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434720
REMOVAL O
2. Remove hood lock assembly mounting bolt and nuts, and then remove hood lock assembly from radiator
core support upper. P
3. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never bend cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.937 in) or more.
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-181, "Inspection".
DLK-179
HOOD LOCK
• Check hood lock assembly for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-181, "Inspection".
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-152, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE
HOOD LOCK CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434722
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock control handle.
2. Disconnect hood lock control cable (2) from hood opener lever
(1) according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as
shown in the figure.
JMKIB0327ZZ
3. Disconnect fuel opener cable from fuel filler lid opener lever of hood lock control handle. Refer to DLK-
194, "FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434721
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect hood lock control cable from hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-179, "HOOD LOCK : Removal
and Installation".
2. Remove fender protector (driver side). Refer to EXT-33, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips.
4. Disconnect hood lock control cable from hood lock control handle. Refer to DLK-180, "HOOD LOCK
CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove grommet on the lower dash, and pull the hood lock control cable toward the passenger compart-
ment.
CAUTION:
While pulling, never damage (peeling) the outside of hood lock control cable.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check that cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly.
PIIB5801E
DLK-180
HOOD LOCK
ment". A
HOOD SAFETY HOOK
B
HOOD SAFETY HOOK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010478165
REMOVAL
C
Remove mounting nuts, and then remove hood lock secondary assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal. D
CAUTION:
After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-181, "Inspection".
Inspection INFOID:0000000010434723 E
NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
F
1. Check that hood opener operating is condition 49 N (5.0 kg, 11.0 lb) or below.
2. Check that secondary latch is securely engaged with secondary striker from the dead load of the hood
assembly. G
3. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary striker when hood assembly is closed [free-fall
from approximately 200 mm (7.874 in) height].
CAUTION:
H
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 (11.811 in) mm or more.
4. While operating hood opener, carefully check that the front end of hood is raised by approximately 20.0
mm (0.787 in). Also check that hood opener returns to the original position.
I
5. Check that secondary latch is properly engaged with secondary striker [4.0 mm (0.157 in)].
6. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply
body grease to hood lock assembly.
J
: Body grease
DLK
JMKIB1164ZZ
DLK-181
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3252GB
1. Outside handle escutcheon 2. Outside handle grip 3. Front gasket

4. Inside handle 5. cable clip 6. Door lock assembly
7. Key rod protector*1 8. Key rod*1 9. TORX bolt
10. Outside handle bracket 11. Rear gasket
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
*1: Driver side only
DLK-182
FRONT DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK
A
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434725
REMOVAL B
1. Disconnect inside handle cable from inside handle. Refer to DLK-183, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and
Installation".
2. Disconnect outside handle cable from outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-183, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : C
3. Disconnect door lock assembly harness connector.
4. Remove door lock assembly screws, and then remove door lock assembly. D
INSTALLATION
E
CAUTION:
• Never reuse door lock assembly screw. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.
• When installing key rod, rotate key rod holder until a click is felt. F
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-183, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection"
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
DOOR LOCK : Inspection INFOID:0000000010434726 G
Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body grease if
necessary. H
: Body grease
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE DLK
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434727
L
REMOVAL
2. Remove inside handle mounting bolt. M
3. Disengage inside handle from door panel while sliding inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then sepa-
rate inside handle.
4. Disconnect inside handle cable, and then remove inside handle. N
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal. O
CAUTION:
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
OUTSIDE HANDLE
P
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434728
REMOVAL
3. Remove sealing screen.
DLK-183
FRONT DOOR LOCK
NOTE:
Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
4. Remove front door glass rear run. Refer to GW-23, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove key rod protector mounting bolts, and then remove key rod protector.
6. Disengage outside handle cable from cable clip.
7. Disengage rod holder, and then disconnect key rod from door lock assembly. (Driver side only)
8. Disconnect outside handle harness connector.
9. Remove grommet (1) of door side. Loosen, through grommet hole, TORX bolt (2) that fixes outside handle
escutcheon.
JMKIB0585ZZ
10. While pulling outside handle (1)according to the numerical order

1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure, remove outside
handle escutcheon (2).
JMKIA0441ZZ
11. While pulling outside handle (1) according to the numerical order
1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure, slide toward
rear of vehicle to remove outside handle.
JMKIA2948ZZ
12. Remove front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2).
JMKIB2240ZZ
DLK-184
FRONT DOOR LOCK
: Pawl A
: Vehicle front
13. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove. B
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5935ZZ E
14. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket
shown in the figure. F
CAUTION:
Never bend the outside handle cable end.
G
JMKIA5936ZZ
I
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• When installing key rod, rotate key rod holder until a click is felt. J
• Check that door lock cables are normally engaged with inside handle and outside handle.
• After installation, check door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.
DLK
DLK-185
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3254GB

4. Cable clip 5. Inside handle 6. Door lock assembly
7. TORX bolt 8. Outside handle bracket 9. Rear gasket
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
1. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-187, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-187, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
DLK-186
REAR DOOR LOCK
3. Remove rear door lower sash mounting bolt, and then remove rear door lower sash.
4. Disconnect door lock assembly harness connector. A
5. Remove door lock assembly screws, and then remove door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION B
CAUTION:
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket. C
D
DOOR LOCK : Inspection INFOID:0000000010434731
necessary. E
: Body grease
F
JMKIA8534ZZ
H
INSIDE HANDLE
I
REMOVAL
J
2. Remove inside handle mounting bolt.
rate inside handle.
DLK
4. Disconnect inside handle cable, and then remove inside handle.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal. L
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE M
N
REMOVAL
2. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "REAR DOOR FINISHER : Removal and Installation". O
NOTE:
P
screen is reused.
DLK-187
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIB0588ZZ

JMKIA9526ZZ

JMKIA2948ZZ
JMKIB2240ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-188
REAR DOOR LOCK
8. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5935ZZ
D
CAUTION: E
G
JMKIA5936ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
• After installation, check door open/close, and lock/unlock operation. I
DLK
DLK-189
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3271GB
1. Back door panel 2. Back door lock assembly

: Body grease
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door trim finisher lower. Refer to INT-31, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect back door lock harness connector.
3. Remove back door assembly mounting bolts, and then remove back door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, check back door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-191, "Inspection".
DLK-190
BACK DOOR LOCK
Inspection INFOID:0000000010434736
A
necessary.
B
: Body grease
D
JMKIB0629ZZ
DLK
DLK-191
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
JMKIB3263ZZ
1. Fuel opener cable 2. Cable protector 3. Fuel filler lid lock assembly
4. Bumper rubber 5. Fuel filler lid assembly 6. Fuel filler spring
: Clip
: Pawl
FUEL FILLER LID

FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434740
REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid assembly.
DLK-192
2. Remove fuel mounting pin (1).
A
JMKIB3183ZZ
D
3. Remove fixing screws, and then remove fuel filler lid assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. E
CAUTION:
• After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the fixing screws. F
• Apply anti-corrosion wax to mounting surface of fixing screw and fuel filler lid to prevent rust.
NOTE:
The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation status.
Unit: mm [in] G
Clearance Evenness
3.7 – 5.3 (-1.0) – (+1.0) H
Fuel filler lid – Body side outer
(0.146 – 0.209) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK
I
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434742
REMOVAL J
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
2. Remove luggage lower finisher RH. Refer to INT-29, "Luggage side trim".
3. In the order of 1→2 as shown in the figure, rotate and disengage DLK
fuel filler lid lock assembly, and then remove fuel filler lid lock
assembly.
NOTE: L
Operation is performed easily when rotating fuel filler lid lock
from passenger room side.
M
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
JMKIB1094ZZ
N
4. In the order of 1→4 as shown in the figure. Disengage fuel filler

lid opener cable (1). Remove fuel filler lid opener cable while
O
pressing stopper pin (2).
JMKIA5719ZZ
DLK-193
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434741
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect fuel opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid opener lever
JMKIA5672ZZ
3. Remove front kicking plate inner RH and rear kicking plate inner RH. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and
Installation".
4. Remove dash side finisher RH. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish RH. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove luggage side lower finisher RH. Refer to INT-29, "Luggage side trim".
7. Disconnect fuel opener cable from fuel filler lid lock assembly. Refer to DLK-193, "FUEL FILLER LID
LOCK : Removal and Installation".
8. Remove fuel opener cable from each harness protector.
9. Remove cable protector.
10. Remove fuel opener cable fixing clips, and then remove fuel opener cable.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse cable protector. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
DLK-194
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
Remove the TORX bolt (A), and then remove door switch (1).
E
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. F
DLK
DLK-195
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
CONSOLE
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434745
REMOVAL
1. Remove the console rear finisher. Refer to IP-19, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the inside key antenna (console) mounting screw ,
and then remove inside key antenna (console) .
JMKIB3257ZZ
INSTALLATION
LUGGAGE ROOM
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434746
REMOVAL
Remove the mounting clip , and then remove inside key antenna
(luggage room) .
JMKIB3258ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-196
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
OUTSIDE HANDLE
B
REMOVAL
Remove the outside handle grip. Refer to DLK-183, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
C
INSTALLATION
REAR BUMPER D
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010434749
REMOVAL E
1. Remove the rear bumper fascia assembly. Refer to EXT-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector, and
F
then remove outside key antenna (rear bumper) .
JMKIB3259ZZ
I
INSTALLATION
J
DLK
DLK-197
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front bumper fascia assembly. Refer to EXT-20, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the Intelligent Key warning buzzer mounting bolt , and
then remove the Intelligent Key warning buzzer .
JMKIB2758ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-198
A
1. Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key. B
2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver (A) wrapped with a cloth into the

slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the C
lower part.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
• The key fob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet, D
immediately wipe it dry.
PIIB6221E
F
3. Replace the battery with new one.
Battery replacement :Coin-type lithium battery G

(CR2032)
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts, and then push them H
together until it is securely closed.
CAUTION:
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other for-
eign materials off the electrode contact area. I
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key
functions work normally.
J
PIIB6222E DLK
DLK-199
APPLICATION NOTICE

APPLICATION NOTICE

• For Europe
• For Europe
• For Australia
• For Australia
DLK-200
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
connectors. G
WARNING: H
serious injury.
INFOID:0000000010479688
DLK
CAUTION:
power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables. L
• Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing M
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro- N
OPERATION PROCEDURE
O
NOTE:
2. Open driver door. P
NOTE:
DLK-201
PRECAUTIONS
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a
nected and the steering wheel can be turned.
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock
windshield.
PIIB3706J
NOTE:
NOTE:
SEF289H
NOTE:
1. Open the hood.

DLK-202
PRECAUTIONS
V9X engine : 4 minutes A
CAUTION:
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function. B
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC. C
Work INFOID:0000000010434757
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their D
operational.
E
DLK
DLK-203
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
SIIA0995E
JMKIA3050ZZ
Power tool
PIIB1407E
DLK-204
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
B
DLK
JMKIB3270ZZ
M
1. Front door lock assembly (passenger 2. BCM 3. Push-button ignition switch
side) Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL
SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca- N
tion"
4. Combination meter 5. Front power window switch (passen- 6. Door switch
ger side) (door lock and unlock switch)
O
7. Door lock assembly 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Back door opener switch assembly
tor)
P
moved
DLK-205
COMPONENT PARTS
Item Function
Combination meter
• Transmits vehicle speed signal to CAN communication line.
BCM eration signal from remote keyless entry receiver and each switch.
Door lock actuator
Door request switch
Inside key antenna
• Installed in the instrument center, consol and luggage room.
Outside key antenna
• Integrated in the outside handle.
Intelligent Key
• Engine start
Unlock sensor
DLK-206
A
JMKIB2435GB F
G
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
H
locked. I
ator are unlocked.
Unlock Sensor J
and unlock switch.
M
• Doors are not locked by Intelligent Key, door request switch
LOCK/UNLOCK and auto door lock function
• Ignition position warning function is not activated N

Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock /unlock state, refer to INL-8, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP O
When ignition switch is ON and BCM receives shock status signal, it operates automatically to unlock all P
All doors are locked once, but BCM immediately unlocks all doors, according to driver door lock status
detected by unlock sensor, when door lock operation is performed, driver door is open, and ignition position is
ON.
DLK-207

is locked
is locked
is locked
tion
is locked
tion
ON → OFF – –
locked)
OFF → ON – –
(timer is stop)
tion

satisfied.

Operation condition
NOTE:
DLK-208
A
B
DLK
L
JMKIB3316GB
CAUTION:
registered.
P
telligent Key
DLK-209
Key reminder DLK-216
inside the vehicle
Warning DLK-216
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

JMKIB3317GB
Key.
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it activates the outside key antenna and
inside key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the
Intelligent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door.
• BCM lock/unlock each door and blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) at the same time
as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION
operated.
DLK-210
Each door request switch operation Operation condition A

B
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area
• Ignition switch is in the OFF position C
Unlock
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area *
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare D
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.

The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function E
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
ever, this operating range depends on the ambient conditions. F
JMKIA4534ZZ
H
Lock Operation I
When an LOCK signal is sent from door request switch (driver side, passenger side or back door), all doors
are locked.
Unlock Operation J
• When an UNLOCK signal from front door request switch (driver side) is transmitted, driver side door
unlocks. When another UNLOCK signal is transmitted within 5 seconds, all door unlocks.
• When an UNLOCK signal from front door request switch (passenger side) is transmitted, all doors unlocks. DLK
• When an UNLOCK signal from back door request switch is transmitted, back door open permission is set.
When another UNLOCK signal is transmitted within 5 seconds, all door unlocks (except back door).
How to change anti-hijack mode.
L
With CONSULT
Anti-hijack mode can be set to ON or OFF using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT M
Anti-hijack function can be set to ON/OFF by user with a registered Intelligent Keyfob.
• ON/OFF can be switched when Intelligent Key lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for
5 seconds or more while steering lock is locked. N
OFF → ON : 1 blink
ON → OFF : 3 blinks O

When doors are locked or unlocked by door request switch, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a reminder. P
Reminder function does not operate if ignition switch in ON position.
Door lock operation

Lock Once
DLK-211
Door lock operation

After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
vate.


Hazard warning lamp
Outside key antenna
Door request switch
Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Door lock function Door lock actuator
Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
Hazard reminder function × × × ×
Door lock status indicator operation ×
DLK-212
JMKIB3635GB F

G
bumper) and inside key antenna and transmits the request signal to the Intelligent Key. And then, check that H
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver. I
OPERATION CONDITION J

DLK
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area*
L
*
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA M
door opener switch . However, this operating range depends on N
P
JMKIA1955ZZ

DLK-213


Inside key antenna
Function
Back door switch

Intelligent Key
BCM

JMKIB3318GB
OPERATION
• Anti-hijack function
• Hazard reminder function
• Auto door lock
• Door lock status indicator operation
OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each doors, however the opera-
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal transmitted from
Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM transmits door lock/unlock signal to each door lock actuator and operates each door lock actuator,
when key ID matches. At the same time, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times).
OPERATION CONDITION
operated.
DLK-214
Remote controller operation Operation condition A

• All doors closed
Lock • Ignition switch in the OFF position
• P position warning is not activated
B
Unlock • Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• P position warning is not activated
C
• When an LOCK signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key, all doors are locked.
• When an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key once, driver side door is unlocked. D
• Then, if an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key again within 5 seconds, all other doors (except
for back door) are unlocked.
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION E
After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
F
G
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR OPERATION H
HAZARD REMINDER FUNCTION I
a reminder. J
Door lock operation

(With Intelligent Key button) DLK
Lock Once
Unlock (anti-hijack operation) Twice (quick) L

Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation. M
N
Hazard warning lamp
Combination meter
Door lock actuator

Intelligent Key
O
Door switch
BCM
P
Hazard reminder function × × × × × ×

DLK-215
JMKIB3319GB
Key remainder func-

Operation condition Operation
tion
Right after door is locked by door lock/unlock switch or driver door lock
knob operation under the following conditions
Driver side door
• Ignition switch is in the OFF position All doors unlock
opened
• Driver side door is opened
Right after driver side door is closed under the following conditions
Driver side door • Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
All doors unlock
closed* • Driver side door is opened
• Driver side door is in unlock state
Right after all doors are closed under the following conditions
Door is open or closed • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• Any door is opened
ing buzzer
• All doors are locked.
accidentally but unlock operation is perform in these cases.
CAUTION:
ligent Key is on the instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system some-
WARNING FUNCTION
The warning function are as per the following items and are given to the user as warning information and
• Intelligent Key system malfunction
• Take away warning
• Door lock operation warning
DLK-216
• Intelligent Key low battery warning
• Key ID verification information A
• Key ID warning
OPERATION CONDITION B
Warning/Information functions Operation procedure C

When condition A or B is satisfied
• Condition A D
• Condition B
- Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while
brake pedal is depressed and ignition switch is LOCK or OFF (When the In- E
• Shift position: Except P position F
For internal
G
Door status changes
from open to close H
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle during Key ID ver- I
• Press push-button ignition switch J
switch operation
DLK
sition
L
ON position
Engine start information M
NOTE:
sition to OFF position N
again.
Intelligent Key low battery warning BCM detects that Intelligent Key is low battery, after ignition switch is turned ON O
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle P
Key ID warning
WARNING METHOD
DLK-217
Warning chime
buzzer ing buzzer
Key System Error

al
JMKIB1526ZZ
P position warn- For internal Shift to Park Activate —

ing
JMKIB1527ZZ

Door is open to
Activate Activate
close
Take away
No Key Detected
warning
Push-ignition
Activate —
switch operation
JMKIB1526ZZ

— — —
els)
JMKIB1396ZZ

— — —
els)
JMKIB3307ZZ
JMKIB1529ZZ
DLK-218
Warning chime
buzzer ing buzzer
B
Key ID verification information — — — C
JMKIB1399ZZ D
E
F
JMKIB1401ZZ

H
JMKIB1526ZZ
I
J

DLK

Function L
Outside key antenna
Door request switch
Inside key antenna
Steering lock unit

Intelligent Key
Door switch
M
BCM
N
P position warning × × × × × O
Take away warning P
× × × × × × ×
operation
DLK-219
Key ID warning
Steering lock information
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Function
Intelligent Key
×
DLK-220
Door switch
Door request switch

×
Inside key antenna
Outside key antenna

Steering lock unit

×
×

×
×

×
×
BCM
[TYPE 2]
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
JMKIA6011GB

NOTE:
OPERATION CONDITION
I
Back door open J
NOTE:
open. DLK
in unlock state.
DLK-221
COMMON ITEM
APPLICATION ITEM

Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
NOTE:
×: Applicable item
Diagnosis mode
Door lock DOOR LOCK × × ×
Interior room lamp timer INT LAMP × × ×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × ×
Automatic A/C AIR CONDITONER ×
• Intelligent Key system
INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×
• Engine start system
NATS IMMU × × ×
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × ×
— THEFT ALM* × × ×
— RETAINED PWR* ×
*: This item is displayed, but not used.
CONSULT.
DLK-222

Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
B
SLEEP>LOCK
normal mode (Power supply position is “LOCK”)
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
SLEEP>OFF C
normal mode (Power supply position is “OFF”.)
LOCK>ACC While turning power supply position from “LOCK” to “ACC”
ACC>ON While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “IGN”
D
While turning power supply position from “RUN” to “ACC” (Vehicle
RUN>ACC
is stopping and selector lever is except P position.)
While turning power supply position from “CRANKING” to “RUN”
CRANK>RUN E
(From cranking up the engine to run it)
While turning power supply position from “RUN“ to “ACC” (Emer-
RUN>URGENT
gency stop operation)
F
ACC>OFF Power supply position While turning power supply position from “ACC” to “OFF”
status of the moment a
Vehicle Condition OFF>LOCK While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “LOCK”
particular DTC is de-
OFF>ACC tected* While turning power supply position from “OFF” to “ACC” G
ON>CRANK While turning power supply position from “IGN” to “CRANKING”
While turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-
OFF>SLEEP
tion is “OFF”.) to low power consumption mode H
While turning BCM status from normal mode (Power supply posi-
LOCK>SLEEP
tion is “LOCK”.) to low power consumption mode
LOCK Power supply position is “LOCK”. I
OFF Power supply position is “OFF”.
ACC Power supply position is “ACC”.
J
ON Power supply position is “IGN”
ENGINE RUN Power supply position is “RUN”.
CRANKING Power supply position is “CRANKING”. DLK
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
IGN Counter 0 - 39 • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition L
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
M
*: Refer to the following for details at the power supply position.
• LOCK: Ignition switch OFF with steering locked
• OFF: Ignition switch OFF with steering unlocked
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC N
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANKING: At engine cranking O
DOOR LOCK
P
WORK SUPPORT
DLK-223

Anti-hijack function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
Signature light function can be changed to operation with this mode
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
SHOCK SENSOR unit.)
NOTE:
KEY SW
ACTIVE TEST

NOTE:
SUPER LOCK
INTELLIGENT KEY
INFOID:0000000010478852
WORK SUPPORT
DLK-224
Monitor item Description A

mode B
• On: Operate
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode C
NOTE:
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN D
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec E
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 6: 4 minutes F
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored G
• Off: Non-operation H
NOTE:
ANSWER BACK
Reminder function (door request switch) mode can be selected from the following with this I
ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UN- mode
LOCK • On: hazard warning lamp operate
J
Reminder function (Intelligent Key) mode can be selected from the following with this mode
• On: hazard warning lamp operate
UNLOCK
NOTE: DLK
This item is indicated, but not used
SELF-DIAG RESULT L
DATA MONITOR
NOTE: M
N
REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side) O
P

BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
DLK-225
NEUTRAL SW - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of park/neutral position switch
ST/INHIRELAY-IPDM
tion
IS STATUS - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start system
DOOR STAT-RR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of rear door RH status
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
NOTE:
PRMT RKE STRT
I-KEY OK FLAG
vehicle
unnecessary
CRNK PRBT TMR
function operation
NOTE:
SHORT CRANK
RKE OPE COUN1
NOTE:
RKE OPE COUN2
DLK-226
A
S/L LOCK REQ Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit lock request signal B
VEH SPEED ERROR (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal C
D
S/L LOCK NOT PERMIT Indicates [Inhibition/No inhbt] condition of inhibit steering lock E
F
S/L LOCK POSITION (CAN) Indicates [Armed/Malf/Unlocked/Undefined] condition of lock/unlock position signal G
S/L HI-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of hi-level malfunction
H
S/L SENSOR POWER (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of sensor test power supply I
J

RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key DLK
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored L
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key M
NOTE:
RKE PBD
NOTE: N
KEY SW
NOTE:
IGN SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored O
NOTE:
START SW
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models. P

2
* : OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.
ACTIVE TEST
DLK-227

This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation
OUTSIDE BUZZER • On: Operate
• Buzzer 1: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipi...) when CONSULT screen is touched
• Buzzer 3: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipipi-pipipipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
touched
• KEY ON:[ Intelligent key system malfunction] displays when CONSULT screen is touched
INDICATOR
This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation
FLASHER
NOTE:
HORN
NOTE:
MIRROR +5
This test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
cation
NOTE:
IGNITION RELAY
NOTE:
ENGINE START
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
NOTE:
REVERSE LAMP TEST
NOTE:
KEYFOB P/W TEST
NOTE:
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
DLK-228
A
This test is able to check trunk room lamp operation B
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
TRUNK C
D
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable E

F
NOTE: G
NOTE: H
KEY CYL SW-TR
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored I
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
BACK DOOR OEPENR SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch J
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
DLK
DLK-229
BCM

BCM
ECU Reference
BCS-87, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-89, "DTC Index"
DLK-230
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM A
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
LHD
B
LHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010434777
DLK
JRKWE3958GB
DLK-231
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3959GB
DLK-232
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3960GB
DLK-233
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3961GB
DLK-234
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3962GB
DLK-235
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3963GB
DLK-236
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3964GB
DLK-237
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3965GB
DLK-238
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3966GB
DLK-239
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3967GB
DLK-240
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3968GB
DLK-241
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3969GB
DLK-242
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3970GB
P
RHD
DLK-243
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
RHD : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000010686601
JRKWE3984GB
DLK-244
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3985GB
DLK-245
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3986GB
DLK-246
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3987GB
DLK-247
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3988GB
DLK-248
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3989GB
DLK-249
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3990GB
DLK-250
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3991GB
DLK-251
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3992GB
DLK-252
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3993GB
DLK-253
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3994GB
DLK-254
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3995GB
DLK-255
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3996GB
DLK-256
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
DLK
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-257
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
- Erase DTC.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
>> GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 6.
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
YES >> GO TO 7.
SULT.
DLK-258
Is malfunctioning part detected? A
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART B

C
ment.
D
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the E
symptom is not detected. F
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4. G
DLK
DLK-259
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT display
description

KEY”.

DLK-260
(+) A
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
B
When Intelligent Key is not in C

JMMIA1652GB
D
116
E
F
JMMIA1653GB
M69 Ground
G

the antenna detection area H
JSMIA1348GB
117 I
J
DLK
JSMIA1406GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
N
Continuity
O
116 2
M69 M73 Existed
117 1
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. P
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
116
M69 Not existed
117
DLK-261
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

JMMIA1652GB
116

JMMIA1653GB
M69 Ground

JSMIA1348GB
117

JSMIA1406GB

DLK-262
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B
CONSULT display
description C
room) circuit is open or shorted] D

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT F
KEY”.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected? G
H
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 I

J
DLK
DLK-263
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

JMMIA1652GB
22 Ground

JMMIA1653GB
B4

JSMIA1507GB
23 Ground

JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
nector.

Continuity
22 2
B4 B53 Existed
23 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
22
B4 Not existed
23
DLK-264

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 B
C
(+) D
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E
When Intelligent Key is not in the F

G
JMMIA1652GB
22 Ground
H
I
JMMIA1653GB
B4
J

DLK
JSMIA1507GB L
23 Ground
M
N
JSMIA1506GB

O
DLK-265
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

TRUNK/BACK DOOR OPEN Back door OPEN

2. Disconnect back door lock assembly connector.
(+)
Connector Terminal
Back door
B2 1 Ground ON 9 - 16 V
opener switch
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
BCM Back door lock assembly

Continuity
B3 121 B2 1 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B3 121 Not existed

DLK-266
Back door lock assembly A

Continuity
B2 2 Existed
B
C
DLK
DLK-267
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Pressed ON
Released OFF

(+)
Connector Terminal
D94 1 Ground 9 - 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH CIRCUIT
nector.

Continuity
B4 16 D94 1 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B4 16 Not existed
DLK-268
Back door opener switch assembly A

Continuity
D94 4 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H
Back door opener switch assembly I

Terminal

1 4 J
YES >> INSPECTION END DLK
DLK-269
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Pressed On
Released Off

(+)
Connector Terminal
D94 2 Ground 9 - 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
nector.

Continuity
B4 6 D94 2 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B4 6 Not existed
DLK-270

Continuity
D94 3 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H

Terminal
Pressed Existed
2 3 Back door request switch J
DLK-271
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Touch “Buzzer 1”, “Buzzer 2” or “Buzzer 3” to check that it works normally.
No >> Refer to DLK-272, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK METER BUZZER CIRCUIT

Yes >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-272
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. C
Monitor item Status D

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
E
NO >> Refer to DLK-273, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure". F
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL G

3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground. H
LHD models
(+)
I
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
J
2 Unlock
3 Lock
RHD models DLK

(+)
(driver side) L
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
D25 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V M
3 Lock
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side). N
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector. O
connector.
LHD models P
Continuity
141 3
M68 D1 Existed
148 2
DLK-273
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
RHD models
Continuity
141 3
M68 D25 Existed
148 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
141
M68 Not existed
148
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
141 Lock
148 Unlock
PASSENGER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK

DLK-274
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
LHD models
(+) A
(passenger side)
2 Unlock
3 Lock
C
RHD models
(+)
Front door lock assembly D
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock E
3 Lock
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (passenger side). F
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT G
ness connector. H
LHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal I
139 2
M68 D25 Existed
141 3
J
RHD models
Continuity
DLK
139 2
M68 D1 Existed
141 3
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. L
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal M
Ground
139
M68 Not existed
141
N
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. O
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. P
DLK-275
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+)
Connector Terminal
139 Unlock
141 Lock
REAR LH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK

(+)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
124 2
B3 D51 Existed
125 3
DLK-276
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed B
125
YES >> GO TO 3. C
1. Connect BCM connector. D
(+) E
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
F
125 Lock
REAR RH H
1.CHECK FUNCTION I

2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. J
Monitor item Status

DLK
ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
M

N
O
(+)
P
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-277
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Continuity
124 2
B3 D64 Existed
125 3
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock
DLK-278
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON
G

I
LHD models
(+)
Power window main switch (–) Voltage J
Connector Terminal
3
D10 Ground 9 - 16 V
15 DLK
RHD models
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
3 M
D30 Ground 9 - 16 V
15
N
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT O
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
LHD models P
Continuity
50 3
M70 D10 Existed
80 15
DLK-279
RHD models
Continuity
50 3
M70 D30 Existed
80 15
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed
80
PASSENGER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON

LHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
1
D37 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
DLK-280
RHD models
(+) A
Connector Terminal
1
B
D7 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT D
ness connector. E
LHD models
Continuity F
50 1
M70 D37 Existed
80 2 G
RHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
50 1
M70 D7 Existed
80 2
I
BCM
Continuity J
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed
80 DLK
NO >> Repair or replace harness. L

Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". M
DOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Removal and Installation". N
DLK-281
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ON Turns ON
OFF Turns OFF

(+)
Connector Terminal
NO >> GO TO 2.
BCM Indicator unit

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
M69 111 Not existed
DLK-282
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B

Pressed ON D
Released OFF
Pressed ON
Released OFF
G
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front outside handle assembly connector. H
3. Check voltage between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly harness connector and ground.
LHD models
(+) I
Front outside handle assembly (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
J
Driver side D8
3 Ground 9 – 16 V
Passenger side D38
RHD models DLK

(+)
L
Connector Terminal
Driver side D39
3 Ground 9 – 16 V
Passenger side D9 M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector. O
2. Check continuity between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly harness connector and BCM har-
ness connector.
LHD models
P
Front outside handle assembly BCM
Continuity
Driver side D8 105
3 M69 Existed
DLK-283
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
RHD models
Continuity
Driver side D39 105
3 M69 Existed
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly harness connector and ground.
LHD models
Front outside handle assembly
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D8
3 Not existed
Passenger side D38
RHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D39
3 Not existed
Passenger side D9
Check continuity between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly harness connector and ground.
LHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D8
4 Existed
Passenger side D38
RHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D39
4 Existed
Passenger side D9
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning outside handle grip.
>> INSPECTION END


DLK-284
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch terminals. A

Terminal B
Pressed Existed
C
D
DLK
DLK-285
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
MONITOR” mode.

Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

3. Check signal between malfunctioning door switch harness connector and ground.
LHD models
(+)
Door switch (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
Driver side B55
Passenger side B92
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
RHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92
Passenger side B55
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
DLK-286
DOOR SWITCH
YES-1 >> Back door: GO TO 3. A
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT B
C
LHD models
Door switch BCM
Continuity
D
Driver side B55 17
Rear LH B56 3 B4 12 Existed E
Rear RH B93 10
Back door B2 11
F
RHD models
Door switch BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal G
Driver side B92 17
H
Rear RH B93 10
Back door B2 11 I
LHD models
Door switch J
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B55
DLK
Rear RH B93 L
Back door B2
RHD models
M
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92 N
Rear RH B93 O
Back door B2
Is the inspection result normal? P
DLK-287
DOOR SWITCH

Continuity
B2 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Door switch
Terminal
Pressed Existed
Driver side
Pressed Existed
Passenger side
Ground part of door Released Not existed
3 Door switch
Rear LH
Pressed Existed
Rear RH

Back door 3 4
DLK-288
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
Monitor item Status

LH Front turn signal lamp LH Turns ON D
E
F
1.CHECK HAZARD OPERATION G

tion" (halogen headlamp models). H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EXL-146, "Symptom Table" (LED headlamp models) and EXL-303, "Symptom Table" I
J
>> INSPECTION END DLK
DLK-289
INFORMATION DISPLAY
INFORMATION DISPLAY
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER

Refer to MWI-28, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-290
A


E
OCC0607D
DLK
DLK-291
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ON Buzzer sounds

(+)
Connector Terminal
buzzer
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
E60 164 Not existed
DLK-292
Intelligent Key warning buzzer A

Continuity
E7 3 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> Replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
E
DLK
DLK-293
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
DRIVER SIDE

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1406GB
M69

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front outside handle assembly (driver side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front outside handle assembly (driver side) har-
ness connector.
DLK-294
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
LHD models
BCM Front outside handle assembly (driver side) A
Continuity
100 1
M69 D8 Existed B
120 2
RHD models
BCM Front outside handle assembly (driver side)
Continuity C
100 1
M69 D39 Existed
120 2 D
BCM E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
100
M69 Not existed F
120
YES >> GO TO 3. G
H
1. Replace front outside handle assembly (driver side). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and front outside handle assembly (driver side) connector.
I
DLK
DLK-295
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1406GB
M69

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

PASSENGER SIDE

DLK-296
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
(+) A
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
B

C
detection area

D
ON
E
tection area
F
JSMIA1506GB
M69
G

is not in the antenna H
detection area

119 Ground and any door switch is I
ON
When Intelligent Key J

tection area
DLK
JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT M
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front outside handle assembly (passenger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front outside handle assembly (passenger side)
harness connector.
N
LHD models
BCM Front outside handle assembly (passenger side)
Continuity
118 2
M69 D38 Existed
119 1
RHD models
P
Continuity
118 2
M69 D9 Existed
119 1
DLK-297
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
118
M69 Not existed
119
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace front outside handle assembly (passenger side). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and front outside handle assembly (passenger side) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB
M69

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

REAR BUMPER
DLK-298
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. B
(+)
Signal C
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

E
detection area
JMMIA1652GB
21 F
When Intelligent Key G

tection area
H
ON
I
detection area J
JSMIA1507GB
24
DLK

is in the antenna de- L
tection area
JSMIA1506GB M
NO >> GO TO 2. N

1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector. O
nector.
P
Continuity
21 2
B4 B52 Existed
24 1
DLK-299
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
BCM
Ground
21
B4 Not existed
24
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area
JMMIA1652GB
21

tection area

ON

detection area
JSMIA1507GB
24

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

DLK-300
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SWITCH
B
ALL DOOR
C
D
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
YES >> GO TO 4. DLK
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5. M
5.REPLACE BCM
N
O
FRONT DOOR P

DLK-301
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
REAR DOOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE

DLK-302
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
C
PASSENGER SIDE
E
F

G
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM I
REAR LH DLK
L
M
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR RH
DLK-303
Rear RH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

Check rear door lock assembly RH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-304
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to DLK-301, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure". D
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". G
YES >> INSPECTION END H
DLK
DLK-305


Check remote keyless entry function.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Select “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check outside key antenna.
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-107, "REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010488241

DLK-306
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA B

C
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. D
3.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010488243 G
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010488244 H

Check passenger side door request switch. I
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM M
Is the result normal? N
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH O
P

DLK-307
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-308
A
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY B

Does the Intelligent Key belong to the vehicle to checked? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING D

Is the Intelligent Key low battery warning operated? E
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-2 >> Without another registered Intelligent Key: GO TO 4. F
Key. G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 7. H
While depressing the brake pedal, contact the backside of the Intelligent Key that cannot be used to perform I
Is the vehicle in START status? J
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY DLK
for damage.
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY M

N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery. O
Does door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch? P
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
DLK-309
YES >> GO TO 9.
DLK-310
A

YES >> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-311
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to BCS-89, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE BCM
DLK-312
A

YES >> GO TO 2 D
NO >> Set “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.REPLACE BCM
E
F
DLK
DLK-313
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-314
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION D

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-315
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DLK-316
A

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

NO >> GO TO 1. F
DLK
DLK-317
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE OR PASSENGER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-318
A
1.CHECK P POSITION WARNING OPERATION B

Check P position warning operation.
Refer to DLK-41, "WARNING FUNCTION : System Description".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

DLK
DLK-319

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE BCM
DLK-320
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM, TCM AND COMBINATION METER B

C
YES >> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 3.
Refer to DLK-101, "Component Function Check". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch (driver side). I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
Check inside key antenna. DLK
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INFORMATION DISPLAY M

N
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
DLK-321

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DLK-322
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 3.
Refer to DLK-99, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch. I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer. DLK
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA M
N
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
DLK-323
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of
customer's comments; refer to DLK-328, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate
the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a cruise test on the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
defining the noise.
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen-
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
• Buzz – (Like a bumblebee)
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending up on the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
DLK-324
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: A
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
B
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. C
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS D
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. E
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear and mechanics stethoscope). F
• Removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken G
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem- H
porarily.
• Feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
I
• Placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
J
REPAIR THE CAUSE
- Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. DLK
- Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or ure-
thane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized Nissan Parts
Department. L
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. M
The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] N
76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/76884-
71L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks) O
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/73982-
50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in) P
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
DLK-325
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle.Operate the vehicle under the same
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installationinformation.

INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by
applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate
wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturatethe area with silicone, you
will not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to thecenter console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on startsand stops
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put intothe trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
DLK-326
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulatingthe item(s) or component(s) caus-
ing the noise. A
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knockingnoise B
C
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicatingthe conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consistof insulating with felt cloth tape.
SEATS D
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seatis in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditionsshould be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise. E
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame F
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspectedcomponents while duplicating the condi-
tions under which the noise occurs.Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component G
orapplying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or onthe engine wall. The noise is then H
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall I
4. Loose radiator mounting pins J
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best DLK
insulating the component causing the noise. L
DLK-327
PIIB8740E
DLK-328
DLK
PIIB8742E
DLK-329
HOOD
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

HOOD
JMKIB3292ZZ

: Clip
: Pawl
: Body grease
HOOD ASSEMBLY
DLK-330
HOOD
A
CAUTION:
• Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation. B
REMOVAL
WARNING: C
hood assembly.
2. Remove hood hinge mounting nuts, and then remove hood assembly. D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: E
ment". F
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000010478231 G
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
H
DLK
DLK-331
HOOD
JMKIB4355GB
1. Hood assembly 2. Front combination lamp 3. Front fender assembly

: Vehicle front
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
:Body grease

shown below.
DLK-332
HOOD
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
Portion Standard (RH/LH,
MAX)
4.0 – 9.0 ≤ 3.0 B
C Clearance
Hood – Front combination [0.157 – 0.354] [0.118]
A–A
lamp 0.0
D Surface height — C
[0.000]
E Clearance * —
Hood – Front fender B–B ≤ 3.0 D
F Surface height —
[0.118]
*: No more than 2 times left to right or right to left.
E
2. Remove hood lock assembly. F
3. Adjust the surface height of hood assembly, front fender assembly, and front combination lamp according
to the specified value, by rotating hood bumper rubber (body side).
4. Loosen hood hinge mounting bolts. G
5. Adjust clearance of hood according to the specified value, by moving the hood assembly.
6. Tighten hood hinge mounting bolts to the specified torque.
H
7. Move hood lock assembly laterally until the center of primary striker and hood lock assembly are vertical
when viewed from the front.
8. Position hood lock assembly and engage primary striker. Check hood lock assembly and primary striker
for looseness. I
9. Tighten hood lock assembly mounting bolts and nut to the specified torque.
10. Rotate bumper rubber 1/2 of a rotation counterclockwise in upward direction.
J
11. After adjusting, check that hood opens and closes normally. Refer to DLK-363, "Inspection".
12. Install front grille. Refer to EXT-26, "Removal and Installation".
HOOD HINGE DLK
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010478232
L
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood assembly. Refer to DLK-331, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove upper mounting bolt of front fender assembly. Refer to DLK-342, "Removal and Installation". M
3. Remove hood hinge mounting bolts, and then remove hood hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. N
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-331, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust- O
ment".
P
DLK-333
HOOD
: Body grease
JMKIB2933ZZ
HOOD SUPPORT ROD

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
WARNING:
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
HOOD INSULATOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
DLK-334
A
HRA2DDT
B
JMKIB3298GB
J
4. Air guide LH
DLK
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

L
REMOVAL
M
a. Disconnect hood switch harness connector. N
5. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips from radiator core support upper. Refer to DLK-360, O
"Exploded View".
7. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-24, "Removal and Installation". P
10. Remove A/C pipe bracket mounting bolt.
• For Europe: Refer to Refer to HA-33, "Exploded View".
• Except for Europe: Refer to Refer to HA-124, "Exploded View".
DLK-335
INSTALLATION
MR16DDT
JMKIB3299GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
REMOVAL
"Exploded View".
DLK-336
A
E1BIA1725ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. E
MR20DD
MR20DD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010678770 F
T/M models
G
DLK
JMKIB3632GB
N

4. Air guide LH 5. Air guide plate O
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
DLK-337
CVT models
JMKIB3633GB

4. Air guide LH 5. Air guide plate
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
MR20DD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010678771
REMOVAL
"Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
K9K
DLK-338
JMKIB3298GB
I
4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) J
DLK
REMOVAL
L
a. Disconnect hood switch harness connector. M
5. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips from radiator core support upper. Refer to DLK-360, N
"Exploded View".
7. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-24, "Removal and Installation". O
10. Remove A/C pipe bracket mounting bolt. P
INSTALLATION
R9M
DLK-339
T/M models
JMKIB3299GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
CVT models
JMKIB3300GB
DLK-340
1. Radiator core support upper 2. Air guide RH 3. Air lower guide A

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
B
REMOVAL C
3. Remove hood switch. D
E
"Exploded View".
F
8. Remove horn. Refer to HRN-7, "Removal and Installation". G
• For Europe: Refer to Refer to HA-77, "Exploded View". H
INSTALLATION I
DLK
DLK-341
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3315GB
1. Front fender seal 2. Front fender assembly 3. Hoodledge cover

: Pawl
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
tion".
DLK-342
FRONT FENDER
carefully pulling upper portion of front fender (1) toward vehicle A
outside.
: Vehicle front
B
JMKIA5633ZZ
D
CAUTION:
front fender, be careful to not deform the front fender while performing the procedure and remov- E
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. F
CAUTION:
bolts. G
- Front door: Refer to DLK-345, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment". H
DLK
DLK-343
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3248GB
1. Front door panel 2. Grommet 3. TORX bolt

4. Door striker 5. Bumper rubber 6. Door check link
7. Door hinge (lower) 8. Door hinge (upper)
: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-344
FRONT DOOR
ment".
B
C
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
D
DLK
JMKIB3256GB
P
DLK-345
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visually and touching.
shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
H Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
I
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

3. Adjust the surface height of front door according to the fitting standard dimension.
6. Raise front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion.
CAUTION:
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply body grease if necessary. Refer to
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
DOOR HINGE
REMOVAL
DLK-346
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight. A
tect door and body.
1. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-342, "Removal and Installation". B
INSTALLATION C
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface. D
ment". E
F
grease if necessary. G
: Body grease
H
JMKIB0321ZZ
J
DOOR CHECK LINK
DLK
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door glass. L
a. Disconnect front door speaker harness connector. M
5. Remove check link mounting bolts of door side. N
INSTALLATION O
CAUTION:
• After installation, check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-348, "DOOR P
DLK-347
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
DLK-348
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
A
I
JMKIB3250GB
1. Rear door panel 2. Grommet 3. TORX bolt J

4. Door striker 5. Door check link 6. Door hinge (lower)
7. Door hinge (upper)

: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY M
CAUTION: N
REMOVAL
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-349
REAR DOOR
ment".
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
JMKIB3256GB

DLK-350
REAR DOOR

A
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between rear door and each part by visually and touching. B
shown below.
Unit: mm [in] C
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance D
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
3.5 – 5.5
L Clearance
[0.138 – 0.217]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0) F
M
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

3. Adjust the surface height of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension. H
6. Raise rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension. I
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts J
and nuts.
tion". DLK
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction. L
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010478255 M
REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker. N
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: O
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-350, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : P
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
DLK-351
REAR DOOR
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
4. Remove door hinge mounting nuts of vehicle body side, and then remove door hinge (upper).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply body grease if necessary.
: Body grease
JMKIB0329ZZ
• Door hinge (lower)
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
DOOR CHECK LINK

REMOVAL
DLK-352
REAR DOOR
6. Take door check link out from the hole of door panel. A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: B
CHECK LINK : Inspection". C
Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Apply body D
: Body grease E
JMKIB0322ZZ
G
DLK
DLK-353
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3637GB
1. Back door hinge 2. Stud ball 3. Back door stay

A. Center mark
B. Seam
: Body grease
, , , : Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
DLK-354
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door trim finisher lower and back door trim finisher upper. Refer to INT-31, "Removal and A
Installation".
lation". B
C
WARNING: D
back door stay.
tion". E
INSTALLATION F
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-355, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : G
Adjustment".
• Check back door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-358, "BACK DOOR HINGE : H
Inspection".
I
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK
DLK-355
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3321GB
1. Roof panel 2. Body side outer 3. Rear bumper fascia

: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-356
BACK DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
Portion Standard
(RH/LH,MAX)
5.0 – 7.0
D Clearance — B
[0.197 – 0.276]
Surface 0 – 2.0
E —
height [0 – 0.079]
C
2.8 – 7.2 < 2.9
F Clearance
[0.110 – 0.283] [0.114]
Surface 0 – 4.0 < 2.5 D
G
height [0 – 0.157] [0.098]
4.8 – 9.2
Back door – Rear bumper fascia C–C H Clearance — E
[0.189 – 0.362]

1. Loosen back door striker mounting TORX bolts. F
value, as shown in the following table. G
CAUTION: H
• Check back door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-358, "BACK DOOR HINGE : I
Inspection".
Adjust back door striker so that it becomes parallel with back door lock insertion direction. J
BACK DOOR STRIKER
DLK
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage rear plate. Refer to INT-30, "Luggage floor trim". L
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-355, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : N
Adjustment".
BACK DOOR HINGE O
P
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
DLK-357
BACK DOOR
CAUTION:
Inspection".
Adjustment".
: Body grease
JMKIB0628ZZ
BACK DOOR STAY

REMOVAL
WARNING:
back door stay.
CAUTION:
JMKIA2255ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
DLK-358
BACK DOOR
CAUTION: A
B
JMKIA3336ZZ
D
E
A : 20 mm (0.787 in)
F
G
JMKIA3609ZZ

H
REMOVAL I
CAUTION:
Never pull strongly on weather-strip. J
INSTALLATION
install weather-strip onto the vehicle. DLK
CAUTION: L
DLK-359
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
LHD models
JMKIB3309GB
1. Hood lock control handle 2. Hood lock assembly 3. Hood safety hook
4. Hood lock control cable
: Clip
: Body grease
DLK-360
HOOD LOCK
RHD models
A
I
JMKIB3308GB
1. Hood lock control handle 2. Hood lock control cable 3. Hood safety hook
J
: Clip
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) DLK

: Body grease L
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010478270 M
REMOVAL
1. Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-26, "Removal and Installation". N
core support upper.
O
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. P
CAUTION:
ment".
DLK-361
HOOD LOCK
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect hood lock control cable (2) from hood opener lever (1) according to the numerical order 1→2
indicated by arrows as shown in the figure.
• LHD models
JMKIB0324ZZ
• RHD models
JMKIB0327ZZ
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
and Installation".
ment.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-362
HOOD LOCK
and apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly. A
PIIB5801E
D
ment".
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-363, "Inspection". E
HOOD SAFETY HOOK
F
REMOVAL
Remove mounting nuts, and then remove hood lock secondary assembly. G
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: H
I
NOTE:
1. Check that hood opener operating is condition 49 N (5.0 kg, 11.0 lb) or below. J
assembly.
3. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary striker when hood assembly is closed [free-fall DLK
CAUTION:
L
M
N
: Body grease
P
JMKIB1164ZZ
DLK-363
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3253GB
1. Outside handle escutcheon 2. Rear gasket 3. Outside handle bracket

4. TORX bolt 5. Key rod*1 6. Door lock assembly
7. cable clip 8. Inside handle 9. Front gasket
10. Outside handle grip
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease

DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
Installation".
2. Disconnect outside handle cable from outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-365, "OUTSIDE HANDLE :
DLK-364
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse door lock assembly screw. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed. B
• When installing key rod, rotate key rod holder until a click is felt.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Refer to DLK-365, "DOOR LOCK : Inspection" C
D
necessary.
E
: Body grease
G
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
H
REMOVAL I
3. Disengage inside handle from door panel while sliding inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then sepa- J
rate inside handle.
DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. L
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010478279 M
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door glass. N
NOTE: O
screen is reused.
4. Remove front door glass rear run. Refer to GW-23, "Removal and Installation". P
DLK-365
FRONT DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIB2462ZZ

JMKIA8374ZZ
JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-366
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5890ZZ
D
CAUTION: E
G
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
• Check that door lock cables are normally engaged with inside handle and outside handle. I
DLK
DLK-367
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3255GB

4. TORX bolt 5. Door lock assembly 6. Inside handle
7. Cable clip 8. Front gasket 9. Outside handle grip
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
DLK-368
REAR DOOR LOCK
INSTALLATION B
CAUTION:
D
necessary. E
: Body grease
F
JMKIA8534ZZ
H
INSIDE HANDLE
I
REMOVAL
J
rate inside handle.
DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE M
N
REMOVAL
NOTE:
P
screen is reused.
DLK-369
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIB2478ZZ

JMKIB2479ZZ

JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-370
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5890ZZ
D
CAUTION: E
G
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
DLK
DLK-371
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3271GB

: Body grease
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-372
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
necessary.
B
: Body grease
D
JMKIB0629ZZ
DLK
DLK-373
LHD models
JMKIB3264ZZ
: Clip
: Pawl
DLK-374
RHD models
A
DLK
JMKIB3263ZZ
4. Bumper rubber 5. Fuel filler lid assembly 6. Fuel filler spring L
: Clip
: Pawl
M
FUEL FILLER LID

N
REMOVAL O
DLK-375
JMKIB3183ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the fixing screws.
NOTE:
Unit: mm [in]
Clearance Evenness
3.7 – 5.3 (-1.0) – (+1.0)
(0.146 – 0.209) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
REMOVAL
3. In the order of 1→2 as shown in the figure, rotate and disengage
assembly.
NOTE:
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
JMKIB1094ZZ

JMKIA5719ZZ
DLK-376
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal. A
CAUTION:
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE B
C
REMOVAL
LHD models
1. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock control handle. D
shown in the figure. E
G
JMKIA5901ZZ
3. Remove front kicking plate inner LH and rear kicking plate inner LH. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and Instal- H
lation".
4. Remove dash side finisher LH. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish LH. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and Installation". I
LOCK : Removal and Installation". J
DLK
RHD models
1. Remove hood lock control handle mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock control handle. L
shown in the figure. M
O
JMKIA5672ZZ
3. Remove front kicking plate inner RH and rear kicking plate inner RH. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and P
Installation".
DLK-377
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-378
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
E
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-379
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
CONSOLE
REMOVAL
JMKIB3257ZZ
INSTALLATION
LUGGAGE ROOM
REMOVAL
(luggage room) .
JMKIB3258ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-380
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
OUTSIDE HANDLE
B
REMOVAL
C
INSTALLATION
REAR BUMPER D
REMOVAL E
F
JMKIB3259ZZ
I
INSTALLATION
J
DLK
DLK-381
REMOVAL
JMKIB2758ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-382
A

lower part.
CAUTION:
PIIB6221E
F

(CR2032)
CAUTION:
J
PIIB6222E DLK
DLK-383
APPLICATION NOTICE

APPLICATION NOTICE

• For Europe
• For Europe
• For Australia
• For Australia
DLK-384
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
connectors. G
WARNING: H
serious injury.
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover DLK
windshield.
L
PIIB3706J N
• With the adoption of Auto ACC function, ACC power is automatically supplied by operating the intelligent key O
P
DLK-385
PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
NOTE:
SEF289H
NOTE:
1. Open the hood.

V9X engine : 4 minutes
CAUTION:
this caution results in the activation of ACC power supply according to the Auto ACC function.
CAUTION:
After installing 12V battery, always check self-diagnosis results of all ECUs and erase DTC.
Work INFOID:0000000010434954
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operational.
DLK-386
PREPARATION
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

C
D
Engine ear Locating the noise
E
SIIA0995E
Remover tool Remove the clips, pawls, and metal clips
PIIB7923J
Power tool I
PIIB1407E J
DLK
DLK-387
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
JMKIB3272ZZ
1. Back door opener switch 2. Power window main switch (door 3. Combination meter
lock and unlock switch)
4. BCM 5. Front power window switch (passen- 6. Door lock assembly
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL ger side) (door lock and unlock
SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca- switch)
tion"
7. Door switch 8. Back door lock assembly
Item Function
Back door lock assembly Opens the back door with the back door open signal from BCM.
BCM detects the vehicle status according to signals from each door switch and
each outside/inside key antenna. BCM transmits drive signal to door lock actuator
when BCM receives operation signal from remote keyless entry receiver and each
BCM
switch.
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for de-
tailed installation location.
Combination meter
Door lock actuator
Keyfob Transmits button operation to remote keyless entry receiver.
Key switch detects that ignition key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder, and
Key switch
then transmits the signal to BCM.
DLK-388
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
A
JMKIB2483GB F
G
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
H
locked. I
ator are unlocked.
Unlock Sensor J
and unlock switch.
M
• Ignition Key is removed from ignition key cylinder and closed driver
side door*1
N
LOCK • Doors other than drivers door are closed*1
• Door are not locked by keyfob*2
• Door lock that is requested is not auto door lock*2
O
UNLOCK Door are not locked by keyfob*2
*1: While door lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction during this state, combination meter buzzer sounds and warns.
*2: When this item becomes OK according to keyfob ID verification, door lock/unlock operation is allowed. P

• While ignition key is inserted in ignition key cylinder and driver door is open, door is not locked when door
lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction. This prevents keyfob from being left in the vehicle.
• While door lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction, combination meter buzzer sounds and
warns.
DLK-389

is locked
is locked
All doors are closed and door Keyfob or auto door lock func-
ON (1 minute timer) OFF
is locked tion
ON ON
is locked tion
ON → OFF – –
locked)
OFF → ON – –
(timer is stop)
Keyfob or auto door lock func-
ON → ON (1 minute timer) ON → OFF –
tion

satisfied.

Operation condition
NOTE:
DLK-390
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
A
B
F
JMKIB3322GB
G
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK OPERATION

H
• When door lock and unlock button of keyfob is pressed, door lock and unlock signal transmits from keyfob to
BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• When BCM receives the door lock and unlock signal, it operates door lock actuator, blinks the hazard lamp
at the same time as a reminder. I
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the keyfob is operated.
J
Remote controller operation Operation condition
• Key switch is off
Lock DLK
Unlock Key switch is off
OPERATION AREA L
To ensure that the keyfob works effectively, use within 100 cm (3 ft) range of each door, however the operable
range may differ according to surroundings.
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION M
Information of super lock function with anti-hijack function.
N
When doors are locked or unlocked by keyfob button operation, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a O
reminder.
Door lock operation

Hazard warning lamp blink P
(With keyfob button)
Lock Once
DLK-391
After door is unlocked by keyfob button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing the fol-
lowing operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not activate.

• Key switch is ON
396, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Type 3)".
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state, refer to INL-8, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000010434962
JMKIB3323GB
SUPER LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010434963
• Super lock provides a higher anti-theft performance than a conventional door lock function.
• BCM controls the super lock system.
• When all doors are closed super lock system can be set/release by keyfob.
• When super lock is set, inside handle of doors do not work.
SUPER LOCK SET OPERATION (LOCK OPERATION)
When Keyfob lock button is operated while all doors are in unlock state, super lock of all doors is set, and
simultaneously, all doors are locked.
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITH ANTI-HIJACK MODE
When Keyfob unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is released,
and simultaneously, driver door are unlocked. When Keyfob unlock button is operated again, all doors are
unlocked.
SUPER LOCK RELEASE OPERATION (UNLOCK OERATION) WITHOUT ANTI-HIJACK MODE
When keyfob unlock button is operated while super lock of all doors is set, super lock of all doors is released,
and simultaneously, all doors are unlocked.
ANTI-HIJACK FUNCTION SETTING
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
• ON/OFF can be switched when keyfob lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for 4 sec-
onds or more while steering lock is locked.
DLK-392
OFF → ON : 1 blinks A
ON → OFF : 3 blink
DLK
DLK-393
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIA6011GB
BACK DOOR OPENER OPERATION

NOTE:
Back door opener actuator is not for locking the back door. The function is only to open the back door.
OPERATION CONDITION

Back door open
NOTE:
open.
• When battery terminal is reconnected and back door does not open, have BCM recognize that all doors are
in unlock state.
DLK-394
A
COMMON ITEM
B
APPLICATION ITEM
C
D
Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. E
• Read and save the vehicle specification. F
Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
NOTE:
×: Applicable item H
Diagnosis mode
I
Warning chime BUZZER × × J
Interior room lamp control INT LAMP × × ×
Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × × ×
DLK

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × L
Manual A/C AIR CONDITONER × ×
Body control system BCM × M
— IMMU* × ×
N
— RETAINED PWR* × × O
Panic alarm PANIC ALARM ×
P
NOTE:
*: This item is displayed, but is not used.
DOOR LOCK
DLK-395
WORK SUPPORT

Anti-hijack function can be changed to operate with this mode
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
KEY SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of key switch
ACTIVE TEST

This test is able to check super lock actuator operation
SUPER LOCK • The all door lock actuators are set when “LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are released when “UNLOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
MULTI REMOTE ENT

MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Type 3)
INFOID:0000000010737880
WORK SUPPORT
DLK-396
Test item Description A

Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: Non-operation
• MODE 2: 30 sec.
B
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 6: 4 minute C
NOTE:
ANSWER BACK
D
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS NOTE:
LOCK UNLOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE: E
DATA MONITOR
NOTE: F
G
CONFRM ID ALL
CONFRM ID4 H
Indicates [Yet] at all time.Switches to [Done] when a registered key is inserted into ignition key
CONFRM ID3
cylinder.
CONFRM ID2
I
CONFRM ID1
Indicates [ID OK] when key ID that is registered is received or is not yet received. Indicates [ID
NOT REGISTERED
NG] when key ID that is not registered is received.
J
TP 4
TP 3
Indicates the number of IDs that are registered.
TP 2 DLK
TP 1
CLUTCH SW* Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch interlock switch
L
START CLUTCH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch pedal position switch M
N
NOTE: O
BK DOOR STATE
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key P
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from keyfob
DLK-397
KEY SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch
IGN SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
START SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in START position
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models.

2
* : OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.
ACTIVE TEST

FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/Off]
NOTE:
HORN
This item is indicated, but not monitored
NOTE:
MIRROR+5
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
This test is able to check trunk/luggage room lamp operation
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
TRUNK
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
DLK-398
BCM
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

BCM
B
ECU Reference
C
BCS-87, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-88, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D
BCS-89, "DTC Index"
DLK
DLK-399
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000011487293
JRKWE3971GB
DLK-400
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3972GB
DLK-401
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3973GB
DLK-402
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3974GB
DLK-403
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3975GB
DLK-404
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3976GB
DLK-405
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3977GB
DLK-406
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3978GB
DLK-407
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3979GB
DLK-408
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3980GB
DLK-409
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3981GB
DLK-410
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3982GB
DLK-411
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3983GB
DLK-412
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
DLK
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-413

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
- Erase DTC.
>> GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 6.
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 7.
SULT.
DLK-414
YES >> GO TO 8.

C
ment.
D
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
DLK
DLK-415
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION
Description INFOID:0000000010434971
Perform the system initialization when replacing BCM, replacing keyfob or registering an additional keyfob.
Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
DLK-416
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT. C
D
Monitor item Status
F

G
H
(+)
I
Connector Terminal
Back door
opener switch
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. DLK
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock assembly harness connector. L

Continuity
B3 121 B2 1 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. N
BCM
Continuity
O
B3 121 Not existed

DLK-417

Continuity
B2 2 Existed
DLK-418
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B

Pressed ON D
Released OFF
E
F

H
(+)
D94 1 Ground 9 - 16 V
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH CIRCUIT DLK
nector. L

Continuity
B4 16 D94 1 Existed
N
BCM
Continuity
B4 16 Not existed O

DLK-419

Continuity
D94 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



Terminal

1 4
DLK-420
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
E

(+)
Front door lock assembly I
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock J
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT L
connector. M

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal N
141 3
M68 D26 Existed
148 2
O
BCM
Continuity P
Connector Terminal
Ground
141
M68 Not existed
148
YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-421
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

(+)
Connector Terminal
141 Lock
148 Unlock
PASSENGER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK

(+)
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
ness connector.
DLK-422
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM Front door lock assembly (passenger side) A

Continuity
139 2
M68 D2 Existed B
141 3
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139 D
M68 Not existed
141
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL F
G
(+)
139 Unlock
141 Lock
I
J
REAR LH
DLK
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. L
Monitor item Status M

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
N
O
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL P

DLK-423
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
124 2
B3 D52 Existed
125 3
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock
REAR RH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
DLK-424
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK. A
B
(+) D
Connector Terminal
E
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly RH harness connector. H
Continuity
I
124 2
B3 D65 Existed
125 3
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. J
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal DLK
Ground
124
B3 Not existed
125
L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. M
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. N
(+)
BCM (–) Condition Voltage O
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
B3 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V P
125 Lock
DLK-425
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON

(+)
Connector Terminal
3
D30 Ground 9 - 16 V
15
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
50 3
M70 D30 Existed
80 15
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed
80
DLK-426
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A

YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-68, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : B
PASSENGER SIDE C
1.CHECK FUNCTION D

E

Lock ON
F
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF G
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch is OK. H
I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
DLK
(+)
Connector Terminal L
1
D7 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
N
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) har- O
ness connector.

Continuity P
50 1
M70 D7 Existed
80 2
DLK-427
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed
80
DOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Removal and Installation".
DLK-428
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
Monitor item Status

ON Turns ON D
OFF Turns OFF
E
F

H
(+)
J
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR CIRCUIT DLK
L
BCM Indicator unit
Continuity
M69 111 M4 5 Existed M
BCM N
Continuity
M69 111 Not existed
O
DLK-429
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
MONITOR” mode.

Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off

(+)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92
Passenger side B55
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
YES-1 >> Back door: GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
DLK-430
DOOR SWITCH
Door switch BCM A

Continuity
Driver side B92 17
B

Rear RH B93 10 C
Back door B2 11
D
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92
E

F
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
H
I
Continuity
B2 4 Existed J
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. DLK
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Refer to DLK-431, "Component Inspection". L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch. M
N
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000010502780 O
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
DLK-431
DOOR SWITCH
Door switch
Terminal
Pressed Existed
Driver side
Pressed Existed
Passenger side
3 Door switch
Rear LH
Pressed Existed
Rear RH

Back door 3 4
DLK-432
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Monitor item Status

E
F
1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT G

Refer to EXL-144, "Component Function Check".
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I
>> INSPECTION END J
DLK
DLK-433
FRONT DOOR
1.CHECK FUSE

Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M68 143 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M68 Existed
147
REAR DOOR
1.CHECK FUSE

Passenger door and rear door lock actuator power supply 31 (15 A)
Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-434
A
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
M68 151 Ground 9 – 16 V
Is the measurement value normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT D
BCM E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M68 Existed F
147
YES >> INSPECTION END G
DLK
DLK-435
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

(+)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
1 Set
2 Release
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.

Continuity
148 2
M68 D26 Existed
149 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
148
M68 Not existed
149

YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-436
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
(+) A
Connector Terminal
148 Release
B
149 Set
PASSENGER SIDE D
1.CHECK FUNCTION E

F
YES >> Super lock actuator is OK. G
H
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector. I
(+) J
Front door lock assembly (passenger side) (–) Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
1 Set DLK
2 Release
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT M
ness connector. N

Continuity
139 2
M68 D2 Existed
149 1
P
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M68 Not existed
149
DLK-437
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
139 Release
149 Set
REAR LH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
NO >> Refer to DLK-438, "REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH.
(+)
Connector Terminal
1 Set
2 Release
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
124 2
B3 D52 Existed
131 1
DLK-438
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed B
131

C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL D
E
(+)
Connector Terminal F
124 Release
131 Set
G
H
REAR RH
I
1.CHECK FUNCTION
J
DLK
NO >> Refer to DLK-439, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010502790 L
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH.
N
(+)
Connector Terminal O
1 Set
2 Release
P
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-439
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

Continuity
124 2
B3 D65 Existed
131 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not Existed
131
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Release
131 Set
DLK-440
UNLOCK SENSOR
UNLOCK SENSOR
A
1.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL B

3. Check signal between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground. C
(+)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) Voltage D
Connector Terminal
D26 4 Ground 9 – 16 V
E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
F
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness G
connector.
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side) H

Continuity
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. I
BCM
Continuity J
M69 104 Not existed
3.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT L
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
Front door lock assembly (driver side) M

Continuity
D26 5 Existed
N
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
DLK-441
UNLOCK SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END


Terminal
Unlock Existed
Lock Not existed
DLK-442
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SWITCH
B
ALL DOOR
C
D
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
Refer to DLK-426, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check" (driver side) or DLK-427, "PASSENGER
SIDE : Component Function Check" (passenger side). H
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
YES >> GO TO 4. DLK
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5. M
5.CHECK KEY SWITCH
N
Check key switch.
O
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE BCM P
FRONT DOOR
DLK-443

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
REAR DOOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
DLK-444
A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". E
PASSENGER SIDE
G
H
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR I

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM DLK

2. Confirm the operation after replacement. L
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". M
REAR LH
N
O
Check rear door lock assembly LH. P
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-445
REAR RH

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-446
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-447
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH KEYFOB

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY
Check keyfob battery.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE KEYFOB
1. Replace keyfob.
DLK-448
A

YES >> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-449
1.CHECK “DOOR LOCK–UNLOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

3. Check “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Set “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-450
A
ALL DOOR
B
Check driver door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
C
Does driver door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
D
Check front driver side super lock actuator.
Refer to DLK-436, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". E
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
I

J
Check front driver side super lock actuator.
DLK
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM L
Is the result normal? M
PASSENGER SIDE N
O
Check front passenger side super lock actuator.
Refer to DLK-437, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check". P
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-451
REAR LH

Check super lock actuator rear LH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR RH

Check super lock actuator rear RH.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-452
A

YES >> GO TO 2 D
2.REPLACE BCM
E
F
DLK
DLK-453
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING WITH CONSULT

Refer to DLK-396, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) (Type 3)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-454
A
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH B

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

DLK
DLK-455
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH

Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH
Check driver side door switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-456
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP D
Check hazard warning lamp.

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-457
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
the customer's comments; refer to DLK-462, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to dupli-
cate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by a test drive with the customer.
defining the noise.
• Buzz – (Like a bumble bee)
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that a technician
may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
duplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.
DLK-458
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
B
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
vehicle body.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE D
(Engine ear or mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: E
• Removing the components in the area that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. F
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
porarily. G
• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is are suspected to be the cause of the
noise.
• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
• Looking for loose components and contact marks. H
REPAIR THE CAUSE
I
- separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane J
tape. These insulators are available through the authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. DLK
NOTE:
• URETHANE PADS
• INSULATOR (Foam blocks) L
• INSULATOR (Light foam block)
• FELT CLOTHTAPE M
The following materials, not available through NISSAN Parts Department, can also be used to repair
squeaks and rattles.
• UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE N
• SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that is be visible or does not fit. O
Note: Will only last a few months.
• SILICONE SPRAY
Used when grease cannot be applied.
• DUCT TAPE P
Used to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
DLK-459
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Cluster lid A and instrument panel
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by apply-
ing felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring har-
ness.
CAUTION:
Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, the recheck
of repair becomes impossible.
CENTER CONSOLE
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the following:
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to
repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer.
In addition look for following:
3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
DLK-460
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat A
when the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include: B
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket C
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area. D
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment. E
2. Components that pass through the engine wall F
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment G
H
I
DLK
DLK-461
PIIB8740E
DLK-462
DLK
PIIB8742E
DLK-463
HOOD

HOOD
JMKIB3292ZZ

: Clip
: Pawl
: Body grease
HOOD ASSEMBLY
DLK-464
HOOD
A
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING: C
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: E
ment". F
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
H
DLK
DLK-465
HOOD
JMKIB4355GB

: Vehicle front
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
:Body grease

shown below.
DLK-466
HOOD
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
MAX)
4.0 – 9.0 ≤ 3.0 B
C Clearance
A–A
lamp 0.0
[0.000]
E Clearance * —
[0.118]
E
H
for looseness. I
J
HOOD HINGE DLK
L
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
P
DLK-467
HOOD
: Body grease
JMKIB2933ZZ
HOOD SUPPORT ROD

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
WARNING:
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
HOOD INSULATOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
DLK-468
A
HRA2DDT
B
JMKIB3298GB
J
4. Air guide LH
DLK
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

L
REMOVAL
M
"Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
DLK-469
MR16DDT
JMKIB3299GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
REMOVAL
"Exploded View".
DLK-470
A
E1BIA1725ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
K9K
K9K : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010479348 F
DLK
JMKIB3298GB N

4. Air guide LH O
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
K9K : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010479349 P
REMOVAL
DLK-471
"Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
R9M
T/M models
JMKIB3299GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
DLK-472
CVT models
A
H
JMKIB3300GB

4. Air guide LH I
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

J
REMOVAL
DLK
3. Remove hood switch. L
4. Remove hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-492, "HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation". M
"Exploded View".
6. Remove engine room harness fixing clips from radiator core support upper. N
9. Remove radiator mounting bracket. Refer to CO-125, "Exploded View". O
P
INSTALLATION
DLK-473
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3315GB

: Pawl
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
tion".
4. Remove front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-319, "Removal and Installation".
DLK-474
FRONT FENDER
outside.
: Vehicle front
B
JMKIA5633ZZ
D
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
bolts. G
DLK
DLK-475
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3247GB
1. Front door panel 2. Door hinge (upper) 3. Door hinge (lower)

4. Door check link 5. Bumper rubber 6. Door striker
7. TORX bolt 8. Grommet
: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-476
FRONT DOOR
ment".
B
C
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
D
DLK
JMKIB3256GB
P
DLK-477
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
H Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
I
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

sion.
CAUTION:
and nuts.
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
DOOR HINGE
REMOVAL
DLK-478
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
INSTALLATION C
CAUTION:
ment". E
F
: Body grease
H
JMKIB0321ZZ
J
DOOR CHECK LINK
DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION O
CAUTION:
DLK-479
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
DLK-480
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
A
I
JMKIB3249GB
1. Rear door panel 2. Door hinge (upper) 3. Door hinge (lower) J

4. Door check link 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Grommet

: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY M
CAUTION: N
REMOVAL
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-481
REAR DOOR
ment".
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
JMKIB3256GB

DLK-482
REAR DOOR

A
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in] C
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance D
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
3.5 – 5.5
L Clearance
[0.138 – 0.217]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0) F
M
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

CAUTION:
and nuts.
tion". DLK
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: O
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
DLK-483
REAR DOOR
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Body grease
JMKIB0329ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
DOOR CHECK LINK

REMOVAL
DLK-484
REAR DOOR
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: B
: Body grease E
JMKIB0322ZZ
G
DLK
DLK-485
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3637GB

A. Center mark
B. Seam
: Body grease
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
DLK-486
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
Installation".
lation". B
C
WARNING: D
back door stay.
tion". E
INSTALLATION F
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
Inspection".
I
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK
DLK-487
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3321GB

: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-488
BACK DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
Portion Standard
(RH/LH,MAX)
5.0 – 7.0
D Clearance — B
[0.197 – 0.276]
Surface 0 – 2.0
E —
height [0 – 0.079]
C
2.8 – 7.2 < 2.9
F Clearance
[0.110 – 0.283] [0.114]
Surface 0 – 4.0 < 2.5 D
G
height [0 – 0.157] [0.098]
4.8 – 9.2
[0.189 – 0.362]

CAUTION: H
Inspection".
BACK DOOR STRIKER
DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
BACK DOOR HINGE O
P
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
DLK-489
BACK DOOR
CAUTION:
Inspection".
Adjustment".
: Body grease
JMKIB0628ZZ
BACK DOOR STAY

REMOVAL
WARNING:
back door stay.
CAUTION:
JMKIA2255ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
DLK-490
BACK DOOR
CAUTION: A
B
JMKIA3336ZZ
D
E
A : 20 mm (0.787 in)
F
G
JMKIA3609ZZ

H
REMOVAL I
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: L
DLK-491
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
JMKIB3308GB
: Clip
: Body grease
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000010479380
REMOVAL
core support upper.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-492
HOOD LOCK
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-465, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust- A
ment".
B
REMOVAL
C
2. Disconnect hood lock control cable (2) from hood opener lever
(1) according to the numerical order 1→2 indicated by arrows as D
JMKIB0327ZZ
G
INSTALLATION H
I
REMOVAL J
and Installation".
2. Remove fender protector (driver side). Refer to EXT-33, "Removal and Installation". DLK
CONTROL HANDLE : Removal and Installation". L
ment.
CAUTION: M
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. N
CAUTION:
and apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly. O
PIIB5801E
DLK-493
HOOD LOCK
ment".
HOOD SAFETY HOOK
REMOVAL
Remove mounting nuts, and then remove hood lock secondary assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
NOTE:
1. Check that hood opener operating is condition 49 N (5.0 kg, 11.0 lb) or below.
assembly.
3. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary striker when hood assembly is closed [free-fall
CAUTION:
: Body grease
JMKIB1164ZZ
DLK-494
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
DLK
JMKIB3252GB
N
4. Inside handle 5. cable clip 6. Door lock assembly
7. Key rod protector*1 8. Key rod*1 9. TORX bolt O
10. Outside handle bracket 11. Rear gasket
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
P
: Body grease
DLK-495
FRONT DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
necessary.
: Body grease
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
rate inside handle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
DLK-496
FRONT DOOR LOCK
NOTE:
Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing A
screen is reused.
4. Remove front rear glass run. Refer to GW-23, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove key rod protector mounting bolts, and then remove key rod protector. B
8. Remove grommet (1) of door side. Loosen, through grommet hole, TORX bolt (2) that fixes outside handle C
escutcheon.
F
JMKIB0585ZZ

1→2 indicated by arrows as shown in the figure, remove outside G
JMKIA0441ZZ
J
rear of vehicle to remove outside handle. DLK
M
JMKIA2948ZZ
11. Remove front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2). N
JMKIB2240ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-497
FRONT DOOR LOCK
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5935ZZ
CAUTION:
JMKIA5936ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-498
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
DLK
L
JMKIB3254GB
1. Outside handle escutcheon 2. Outside handle grip 3. Front gasket M

4. Cable clip 5. Inside handle 6. Door lock assembly
7. TORX bolt 8. Outside handle bracket 9. Rear gasket
: Pawl N
: Vehicle front
O
: Body grease
P
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
DLK-499
REAR DOOR LOCK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
necessary.
: Body grease
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
rate inside handle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
NOTE:
screen is reused.
DLK-500
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon. A
JMKIB0588ZZ D
handle escutcheon (2). E
G
JMKIA9526ZZ
6. While pulling outside handle (1) according to the numerical order H

I
JMKIA2948ZZ DLK

L
JMKIB2240ZZ
O
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
P
DLK-501
REAR DOOR LOCK
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5935ZZ

CAUTION:
JMKIA5936ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-502
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
I
JMKIB3271GB
1. Back door panel 2. Back door lock assembly J

: Body grease
DLK

L
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door trim finisher lower. Refer to INT-31, "Removal and Installation". M
INSTALLATION N
CAUTION:
• After installation, check back door open/close, and lock/unlock operation. O
DLK-503
BACK DOOR LOCK
necessary.
: Body grease
JMKIB0629ZZ
DLK-504
A
DLK
L
JMKIB3263ZZ
1. Fuel opener cable 2. Cable protector 3. Fuel filler lid lock assembly M
: Clip
: Pawl N
FUEL FILLER LID O
P
REMOVAL
DLK-505
JMKIB3183ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Unit: mm [in]
Clearance Evenness
3.7 – 5.3 (-1.0) – (+1.0)
(0.146 – 0.209) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
REMOVAL
assembly.
NOTE:
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
JMKIB1094ZZ

JMKIA5719ZZ
DLK-506
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
C
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect fuel opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid opener lever D
E
JMKIA5672ZZ G
3. Remove front kicking plate inner RH and rear kicking plate inner RH. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and
Installation".
H
6. Remove luggage side lower finisher RH. Refer to INT-29, "Luggage side trim". I
8. Remove fuel opener cable from each harness protector. J
DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse cable protector. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed. L
M
DLK-507
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-508
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
A
REMOVAL B
slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the
lower part. C
CAUTION:
• The key fob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet,
immediately wipe it dry. D
E
JMKIB3016ZZ
2. Replace the battery with new one. F
Battery replacement :Coin-type lithium battery

(CR2032) G
CAUTION:
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other foreign materials off the electrode contact
area. H
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key functions work normally.
INSTALLATION I
DLK
DLK-509
APPLICATION NOTICE

APPLICATION NOTICE

• For Europe
• For Europe
• For Australia
• For Australia
DLK-510
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
connectors. G
WARNING: H
serious injury.
windshield.
L
PIIB3706J N
P
DLK-511
PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
NOTE:
SEF289H
NOTE:
1. Open the hood.

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Work INFOID:0000000010435117
operational.
DLK-512
PREPARATION
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

C
D
E
SIIA0995E
PIIB7923J
Power tool I
PIIB1407E J
DLK
DLK-513
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
JMKIB3273ZZ
1. Power window main switch 2. BCM 3. Combination meter

(door lock/unlock switch) Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL
SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion"
4. Front power window switch (passen- 5. Door lock assembly 6. Door switch
ger side) (door lock and unlock
switch)
7. Back door lock assembly 8. Back door opener switch
Item Function
BCM
switch.
Combination meter
Door lock actuator
Door lock and unlock switch Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM.
Key switch
DLK-514
A
JMKIB2483GB F
G
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
H
locked. I
ator are unlocked.
Unlock Sensor J
and unlock switch.
M
• Ignition Key is removed from ignition key cylinder and closed driver
side door*1
N
LOCK • Doors other than drivers door are closed*1
• Door are not locked by keyfob*2
• Door lock that is requested is not auto door lock*2
O
UNLOCK Door are not locked by keyfob*2
*1: While door lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction during this state, combination meter buzzer sounds and warns.
*2: When this item becomes OK according to keyfob ID verification, door lock/unlock operation is allowed. P

• While door lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction, combination meter buzzer sounds and
warns.
DLK-515

is locked
is locked
is locked tion
ON ON
is locked tion
ON → OFF – –
locked)
OFF → ON – –
(timer is stop)
tion

satisfied.

Operation condition
NOTE:
DLK-516
A
JMKIB3324GB F
G
BCM via remote keyless entry receiver. H
at the same time as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION I
Remote controller operation Operation condition J

Lock
Unlock Key switch is off DLK
OPERATION AREA
To ensure that the keyfob works effectively, use within 100 cm (3 ft) range of each door, however the operable L
• When an LOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob, all doors are locked. M
• When an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob once, driver side door is unlocked.
• Then, if an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob again, all other doors are unlocked.
N
With CONSULT
Anti-hijack mode can be set to ON or OFF using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT O
• ON/OFF can be switched when keyfob lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for 5 sec-
onds or more while steering lock is locked.
• When mode is switched, hazard warning lamp blinks. P
OFF → ON : 1 blinks

DLK-517
When doors are locked or unlocked by keyfob button operation, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a
reminder.
Door lock operation

(With keyfob button)
Lock Once


DLK-518
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
JMKIA6011GB

NOTE:
OPERATION CONDITION
I
Back door open J
NOTE:
open. DLK
in unlock state.
DLK-519
COMMON ITEM
APPLICATION ITEM

Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
NOTE:
×: Applicable item
Diagnosis mode
Interior room lamp control INT LAMP × × ×
Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × × ×
Manual A/C AIR CONDITONER × ×
— IMMU* × ×
— RETAINED PWR* × ×
Panic alarm PANIC ALARM ×
NOTE:
*: This item is displayed, but is not used.
DOOR LOCK
DLK-520
A
WORK SUPPORT
Monitor item Description B

• Off: Non-operation C
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable D
Monitor Item Contents E

IGN ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
KEY ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of key switch
F
DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side) G
H
BACK DOOR SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
LOCK STATUS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door driver side I
ACC ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ACC position
KEYLESS LOCK Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from key fob
KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from key fob J
NOTE:
SHOCK SENSOR
DLK
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW L
Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numer-
VEHICLE SPEED
ical value [Km/h]
M
ACTIVE TEST

N
• The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
DOOR LOCK • The door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked when “DR UNLK” on CONSULT screen is O
touched
• “BD ULK” is displayed, but cannot be used
• “OTR ULK” is displayed, but cannot be used
P
NOTE:
DOOR LOCK IND
NOTE:
SUPER LOCK
MULTI REMOTE ENT
DLK-521
INFOID:0000000010738154
WORK SUPPORT

• MODE 2: 30 sec.
AUTO LOCK SET
NOTE:
ANSWER BACK
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS NOTE:
LOCK UNLOCK This item is displayed, but cannot be used
NOTE:
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

CONFRM ID ALL
CONFRM ID4
CONFRM ID3
cylinder.
CONFRM ID2
CONFRM ID1
NOT REGISTERED
TP 4
TP 3
TP 2
TP 1
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key
DLK-522
A
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC B
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from keyfob
C
1
* : It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models. D
ACTIVE TEST E

FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/Off] F
NOTE:
HORN
This test is able to operate the blower relay in fuse block (J/B) G
NOTE: H
MIRROR+5
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
I
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
J
AUTO ACC 1 • On: Operate DLK
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates L
TEST
TRUNK
M
DATA MONITOR N
NOTE:
O
P
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
DLK-523
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
DLK-524
BCM

BCM
B
ECU Reference
C
BCS-87, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-89, "DTC Index"
DLK
DLK-525
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
LHD
JRKWE3958GB
DLK-526
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3959GB
DLK-527
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3960GB
DLK-528
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3961GB
DLK-529
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3962GB
DLK-530
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3963GB
DLK-531
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3964GB
DLK-532
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3965GB
DLK-533
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3966GB
DLK-534
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3967GB
DLK-535
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3968GB
DLK-536
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3969GB
DLK-537
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3970GB
RHD
DLK-538
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3984GB
P
DLK-539
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3985GB
DLK-540
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3986GB
DLK-541
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3987GB
DLK-542
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3988GB
DLK-543
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3989GB
DLK-544
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3990GB
DLK-545
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3991GB
DLK-546
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3992GB
DLK-547
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3993GB
DLK-548
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3994GB
DLK-549
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3995GB
DLK-550
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3996GB
DLK-551
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-552

B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC C
1. Check DTC.
- Erase DTC.
H
>> GO TO 5.
J
>> GO TO 6.
diagnosis order. L
NOTE:
M
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 7.
SULT.
DLK-553
YES >> GO TO 8.
ment.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
DLK-554
A
Perform the system initialization when replacing BCM, replacing keyfob or registering an additional keyfob. B
DLK
DLK-555
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status


(+)
Connector Terminal
Back door
opener switch
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
B3 121 B2 1 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B3 121 Not existed

DLK-556

Continuity
B2 2 Existed
B
C
DLK
DLK-557
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Pressed ON
Released OFF

(+)
Connector Terminal
D94 1 Ground 9 - 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
nector.

Continuity
B4 16 D94 1 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B4 16 Not existed
DLK-558

Continuity
D94 4 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H

Terminal

1 4 J
DLK-559
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK

LHD models
(+)
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
RHD models
(+)
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.
LHD models
Continuity
141 3
M68 D1 Existed
148 2
DLK-560
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
RHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side) A
Continuity
141 3
M68 D25 Existed B
148 2
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
141 D
M68 Not existed
148
YES >> GO TO 3. E
G
(+)
141 Lock
148 Unlock
I
J
PASSENGER SIDE
DLK
1.CHECK FUNCTION

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
N
O

DLK-561
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
LHD models
(+)
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
RHD models
(+)
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
ness connector.
LHD models
Continuity
139 2
M68 D25 Existed
141 3
RHD models
Continuity
139 2
M68 D1 Existed
141 3
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M68 Not existed
141
YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-562
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+) A
Connector Terminal
139 Unlock
B
141 Lock
REAR LH D
1.CHECK FUNCTION E

F
Monitor item Status

G
ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
I

J
DLK
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock M
NO >> GO TO 2. N

Continuity P
124 2
B3 D51 Existed
125 3
DLK-563
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock
REAR RH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK

(+)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-564
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT A

B
Continuity
124 2 C
B3 D64 Existed
125 3
D
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground E
124
B3 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL G
H
(+)
I
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock J
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". DLK
DLK-565
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON

LHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
3
D10 Ground 9 - 16 V
15
RHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
3
D30 Ground 9 - 16 V
15
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
LHD models
Continuity
50 3
M70 D10 Existed
80 15
DLK-566
RHD models
BCM Power window main switch A
Continuity
50 3
M70 D30 Existed B
80 15
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50 D
M70 Not existed
80
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". E
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-68, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : G
PASSENGER SIDE H
1.CHECK FUNCTION I

J

DLK
Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF L
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch is OK. M
N

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O
LHD models P
(+)
Connector Terminal
1
D37 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
DLK-567
RHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
1
D7 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
ness connector.
LHD models
Continuity
50 1
M70 D37 Existed
80 2
RHD models
Continuity
50 1
M70 D7 Existed
80 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed
80
DLK-568
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
Monitor item Status

ON Turns ON D
OFF Turns OFF
E
F

H
(+)
J
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
BCM Indicator unit
Continuity
BCM N
Continuity
M69 111 Not existed
O
DLK-569
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
MONITOR” mode.

Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off

LHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B55
Passenger side B92
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
RHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92
Passenger side B55
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
DLK-570
DOOR SWITCH
NO >> GO TO 2.
C
LHD models
Door switch BCM
Continuity
D
Driver side B55 17
Rear RH B93 10
Back door B2 11
F
RHD models
Door switch BCM
Continuity
Driver side B92 17
H
Rear RH B93 10
Back door B2 11 I
LHD models
Door switch J
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B55
DLK
Rear RH B93 L
Back door B2
RHD models
M
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92 N
Rear RH B93 O
Back door B2
DLK-571
DOOR SWITCH

Continuity
B2 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Door switch
Terminal
Pressed Existed
Driver side
Pressed Existed
Passenger side
3 Door switch
Rear LH
Pressed Existed
Rear RH

Back door 3 4
DLK-572
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
Monitor item Status

E
F

Refer to EXL-195, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description".
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EXL-303, "Symptom Table".
>> INSPECTION END J
DLK
DLK-573
KEY SWITCH
KEY SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “KEY SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Inserted in key cylinder ON
KEY SW Keyfob
Removed from key cylinder OFF
YES >> Key switch is OK.
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect key switch connector.
3. Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground.
Key switch
Voltage
M47 1 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between key switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Key switch BCM

Continuity
3. Check continuity between key switch connector and ground.
Key switch
Continuity
M47 1 Not existed
Check continuity between key switch connector and ground.
Key switch
Continuity
M47 2 Existed
DLK-574
KEY SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4 A
B
YES >> Replace ignition key cylinder. C
DLK
DLK-575
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY

current value becomes about 10 mA.

Is the measurement value within the specification?
NO >> Replace keyfob battery. Refer to DLK-509, "Removal
and Installation".
OCC0607D
DLK-576
A
FRONT DOOR
B
1.CHECK FUSE
C
D
Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2. Disconnect BCM connectors. F
(+) G
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
H
M68 143 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3. I
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. J
BCM
Continuity
Ground
146
M68 Existed
147
L
REAR DOOR
N
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuse is not fusing. O

Passenger door and rear door lock actuator power supply 31 (15 A) P
Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-577
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M68 151 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M68 Existed
147
DLK-578
UNLOCK SENSOR
UNLOCK SENSOR
A

LHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
D1 5 Ground 9 – 16 V
E
RHD models
(+)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) Voltage F
Connector Terminal
D26 4 Ground 9 – 16 V
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. H
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness I
connector.
LHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side) J
Continuity
DLK
RHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal L
M
BCM
Continuity
N
M69 104 Not existed
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground. P
LHD models
Continuity
D1 4 Existed
DLK-579
UNLOCK SENSOR
RHD models
Continuity
D26 5 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



Terminal
Unlock Existed
Lock Not existed
DLK-580
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SWITCH
B
ALL DOOR
C
D
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
YES >> GO TO 4. DLK
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5. M
5.CHECK KEY SWITCH
N
Check key switch.
O
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE BCM P
FRONT DOOR
DLK-581

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
REAR DOOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
DLK-582
A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
2.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE
G
H

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM DLK

REAR LH
N
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-583
REAR RH

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-584
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-585

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE KEYFOB
1. Replace keyfob.
DLK-586
A

YES >> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-587
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
NO >> GO TO 1.
DLK-588
A

YES >> GO TO 2 D
2.REPLACE BCM
E
F
DLK
DLK-589

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-590
A
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH B

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

DLK
DLK-591
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH

Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-592
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP D

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-593
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
defining the noise.
DLK-594
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
B
vehicle body.
porarily.
noise.
I
J
REPAIR THE CAUSE
Department. L
CAUTION:
NOTE:
76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/76884-
71L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in)
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/73982-
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
DLK-595
SILICONE GREASE
SILICONE SPRAY
DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

INSTRUMENT PANEL
wiring harness.
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
TRUNK
DLK-596
ing the noise. A
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
C
SEATS D
noise. E
UNDERHOOD
DLK-597
PIIB8740E
DLK-598
DLK
PIIB8742E
DLK-599
HOOD

HOOD
JMKIB3292ZZ

: Clip
: Pawl
: Body grease
HOOD ASSEMBLY
DLK-600
HOOD
A
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING: C
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: E
ment". F
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
H
DLK
DLK-601
HOOD
JMKIB4355GB

: Vehicle front
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
:Body grease

shown below.
DLK-602
HOOD
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
MAX)
4.0 – 9.0 ≤ 3.0 B
C Clearance
A–A
lamp 0.0
[0.000]
E Clearance * —
[0.118]
E
H
for looseness. I
J
HOOD HINGE DLK
L
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
P
DLK-603
HOOD
: Body grease
JMKIB2933ZZ
HOOD SUPPORT ROD

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
WARNING:
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
HOOD INSULATOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
DLK-604
A
HRA2DDT
B
JMKIB3298GB
J
4. Air guide LH
DLK
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

L
REMOVAL
M
"Exploded View".
DLK-605
INSTALLATION
MR16DDT
JMKIB3299GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
REMOVAL
"Exploded View".
DLK-606
A
E1BIA1725ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
MR20DD
MR20DD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000011734405 F
T/M models
G
DLK
JMKIB3632GB
N

4. Air guide LH 5. Air guide plate O
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
DLK-607
CVT models
JMKIB3633GB

:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
REMOVAL
"Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
K9K
DLK-608
JMKIB3298GB
I
4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) J
DLK
REMOVAL
L
a. Disconnect hood switch harness connector. M
5. Remove hood lock control cable fixing clips from radiator core support upper. Refer to DLK-630, N
"Exploded View".
7. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-24, "Removal and Installation". O
10. Remove A/C pipe bracket mounting bolt. P
INSTALLATION
R9M
DLK-609
T/M models
JMKIB3299GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
CVT models
JMKIB3300GB
DLK-610

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
B
REMOVAL C
E
"Exploded View".
F
• For Europe: Refer to Refer to HA-77, "Exploded View". H
INSTALLATION I
DLK
DLK-611
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3315GB

: Pawl
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
tion".
DLK-612
FRONT FENDER
outside.
: Vehicle front
B
JMKIA5633ZZ
D
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
bolts. G
DLK
DLK-613
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3248GB

: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-614
FRONT DOOR
ment".
B
C
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
D
DLK
JMKIB3256GB
P
DLK-615
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
H Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
I
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

sion.
CAUTION:
and nuts.
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
DOOR HINGE
REMOVAL
DLK-616
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
INSTALLATION C
CAUTION:
ment". E
F
: Body grease
H
JMKIB0321ZZ
J
DOOR CHECK LINK
DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION O
CAUTION:
DLK-617
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
DLK-618
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
A
I
JMKIB3250GB


: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY M
CAUTION: N
REMOVAL
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-619
REAR DOOR
ment".
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
JMKIB3256GB

DLK-620
REAR DOOR

A
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in] C
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance D
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
3.5 – 5.5
L Clearance
[0.138 – 0.217]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0) F
M
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

CAUTION:
and nuts.
tion". DLK
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: O
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
DLK-621
REAR DOOR
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Body grease
JMKIB0329ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
DOOR CHECK LINK

REMOVAL
DLK-622
REAR DOOR
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: B
: Body grease E
JMKIB0322ZZ
G
DLK
DLK-623
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3637GB

A. Center mark
B. Seam
: Body grease
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
DLK-624
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
Installation".
lation". B
C
WARNING: D
back door stay.
tion". E
INSTALLATION F
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
Inspection".
I
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK
DLK-625
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3321GB

: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-626
BACK DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
Portion Standard
(RH/LH,MAX)
5.0 – 7.0
D Clearance — B
[0.197 – 0.276]
Surface 0 – 2.0
E —
height [0 – 0.079]
C
2.8 – 7.2 < 2.9
F Clearance
[0.110 – 0.283] [0.114]
Surface 0 – 4.0 < 2.5 D
G
height [0 – 0.157] [0.098]
4.8 – 9.2
[0.189 – 0.362]

CAUTION: H
Inspection".
BACK DOOR STRIKER
DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
BACK DOOR HINGE O
P
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
DLK-627
BACK DOOR
CAUTION:
Inspection".
Adjustment".
: Body grease
JMKIB0628ZZ
BACK DOOR STAY

REMOVAL
WARNING:
back door stay.
CAUTION:
JMKIA2255ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
DLK-628
BACK DOOR
CAUTION: A
B
JMKIA3336ZZ
D
E
A : 20 mm (0.787 in)
F
G
JMKIA3609ZZ

H
REMOVAL I
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: L
DLK-629
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
LHD models
JMKIB3309GB
: Clip
: Body grease
DLK-630
HOOD LOCK
RHD models
A
I
JMKIB3308GB
J
: Clip

: Body grease L
HOOD LOCK
REMOVAL
core support upper.
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
DLK-631
HOOD LOCK
REMOVAL
• LHD models
JMKIB0324ZZ
• RHD models
JMKIB0327ZZ
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
and Installation".
ment.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-632
HOOD LOCK
PIIB5801E
D
ment".
HOOD SAFETY HOOK
F
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: H
I
NOTE:
assembly.
CAUTION:
L
M
N
: Body grease
P
JMKIB1164ZZ
DLK-633
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3253GB

: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease

DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
Installation".
DLK-634
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
D
necessary.
E
: Body grease
G
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
H
REMOVAL I
rate inside handle.
DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
NOTE: O
screen is reused.
DLK-635
FRONT DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIB2462ZZ

JMKIA8374ZZ

JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-636
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5890ZZ
D
CAUTION: E
G
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
DLK
DLK-637
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3255GB

: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
DLK-638
REAR DOOR LOCK
INSTALLATION B
CAUTION:
D
necessary. E
: Body grease
F
JMKIA8534ZZ
H
INSIDE HANDLE
I
REMOVAL
J
rate inside handle.
DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE M
N
REMOVAL
NOTE:
P
screen is reused.
DLK-639
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIB2478ZZ

JMKIB2479ZZ

JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-640
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5890ZZ
D
CAUTION: E
G
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
DLK
DLK-641
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3271GB

: Body grease
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-642
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
necessary.
B
: Body grease
D
JMKIB0629ZZ
DLK
DLK-643
LHD models
JMKIB3264ZZ
: Clip
: Pawl
DLK-644
RHD models
A
DLK
JMKIB3263ZZ
: Clip
: Pawl
M
FUEL FILLER LID

N
REMOVAL O
DLK-645
JMKIB3183ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Unit: mm [in]
Clearance Evenness
3.7 – 5.3 (-1.0) – (+1.0)
(0.146 – 0.209) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
REMOVAL
assembly.
NOTE:
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
JMKIB1094ZZ

JMKIA5719ZZ
DLK-646
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
C
REMOVAL
LHD models
G
JMKIA5901ZZ
lation".
DLK
RHD models
O
JMKIA5672ZZ
Installation".
DLK-647
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-648
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
E
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-649
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
REMOVAL
lower part.
CAUTION:
JMKIB3016ZZ

(CR2032)
CAUTION:
area.
INSTALLATION
DLK-650
APPLICATION NOTICE
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL A

APPLICATION NOTICE
B
Service information Destination C

• For Europe
D
E
• For Europe
• For Australia F
• For Australia
• For General export G
DLK
DLK-651
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
WARNING:
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
connectors.
WARNING:
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
INFOID:0000000011772967
CAUTION:
power source to the OFF, then disconnect both battery cables.
• Always use CONSULT to perform self-diagnosis as a part of each function inspection after finishing
cannot be turned.
If turning the steering wheel is required with the battery disconnected or discharged, follow the operation pro-
OPERATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
2. Open driver door.
NOTE:
DLK-652
PRECAUTIONS
to OFF position, the accessory power source does not turned OFF and continues to be supplied for a A
nected and the steering wheel can be turned. B
the ignition switch from OFF position to ON position, then to LOCK position. (The steering wheel will lock C
D
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to E
windshield.
PIIB3706J
H
or remote keyless entry or by opening/closing the driver side door. In addition, ACC power is supplied even I
power before disconnecting the 12V battery terminal, observing J
NOTE:
switch is turned OFF and ignition power supply is stopped. If the DLK
• For vehicles with the 2-batteries, be sure to connect the main bat- L
NOTE:
SEF289H
main battery and sub battery disconnected, then DTC may be detected. M
NOTE:
The removal of 12V battery may cause a DTC detection error. N
1. Open the hood. O
4. Get out of the vehicle and close the driver side door. P

DLK-653
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Work INFOID:0000000011772970
operational.
DLK-654
PREPARATION
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

C
D
E
SIIA0995E
JMKIA3050ZZ
Power tool I
PIIB1407E J
DLK
DLK-655
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
JMKIB3270ZZ
1. Front door lock assembly (passenger 2. BCM 3. Push-button ignition switch

side) Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL
tion"
4. Combination meter 5. Front power window switch (passen- 6. Door switch
ger side) (door lock and unlock switch)
7. Door lock assembly 8. Back door lock assembly 9. Back door opener switch assembly
tor)
moved
DLK-656
COMPONENT PARTS
Item Function
• Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM. B
Combination meter
• Transmits vehicle speed signal to CAN communication line. C
D
BCM eration signal from remote keyless entry receiver and each switch. E
• Inputs locks/unlocks signal from BCM and locks/unlocks each door. F
Door lock actuator
Door request switch
G
Inside key antenna
• Installed in the instrument center, consol and luggage room. H
Outside key antenna
• Integrated in the outside handle. I
Intelligent Key
• Engine start
J
Unlock sensor
DLK
DLK-657
JMKIB3634GB
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

locked.
ator are unlocked.
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock /unlock state, refer to INL-8, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
When ignition switch is ON and BCM receives shock status signal, it operates automatically to unlock all
When ignition switch position is ON or ACC and any door is open, all doors cannot locked when door lock and
unlock switch is operated in lock direction.

is locked
is locked
is locked
tion
is locked
tion
DLK-658
A
ON → OFF – –
locked) B
OFF → ON – –
(timer is stop)
ON → ON (30 minutes timer) ON → OFF – Door lock and unlock switch C
tion D
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (LOCK OPERATION)
The interlock door lock function is the function that locks all doors linked with the vehicle speed or shift posi-
tion. It has 2 types as per the following items. E
Vehicle Speed Sensing Auto Door Lock
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects all doors are closed and the vehicle F
speed received from the combination meter via CAN communication becomes 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.
P Range Interlock Door Lock
All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from the P position to any position other than P. G
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects the shift position signal received from the
TCM via CAN communication is shifted from the P position to any position other than P.
H
Setting Change of Automatic Door Lock/Unlock Function
The lock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed.
With CONSULT
Automatic door lock/unlock function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT. I
Without CONSULT
The automatic door lock/unlock function (lock operation) ON/OFF can be switched by performing the following J
operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF)
2. Ignition switch: OFF→ON DLK
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the lock direction within 20 sec-
onds after turning the ignition switch ON.
4. The switching complete when the hazard lamp blinks. L
ON → OFF : 1 blink M
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (UNLOCK OPERATION)

The automatic door lock/unlock function is the function that unlocks all doors linked with the key position or
N
shift position. It has 2 types as per the following items.
IGN OFF Interlock Door Unlock
All doors are unlocked when the ignition position is changed from ON to OFF. O
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition position is changed
from ignition switch ON to OFF.
P Range Interlock Door Unlock P
All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects the shift position signal received from
TCM via CAN communication is shifted from any position other than the P to P position.
Setting Change of Automatic Door Lock/Unlock Function
The unlock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed.
With CONSULT
Automatic door lock/unlock function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
DLK-659
Without CONSULT
The automatic door lock/unlock function (unlock operation) ON/OFF can be switched by performing the follow-
ing operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF)
2. Ignition switch: OFF→ON
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the unlock direction within 20
seconds after turning the power supply position ON.
4. The switching is complete when the hazard lamp blinks.
DLK-660
A
B
DLK
L
JMKIB3316GB
CAUTION:
registered.
P
telligent Key
DLK-661
Key reminder DLK-668
inside the vehicle
Warning DLK-669
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

JMKIB3553GB
Key.
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it starts the outside key antenna and inside
key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the Intelli-
gent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door.
• BCM lock/unlock each door lock actuator.
OPERATION CONDITION
operated.
DLK-662
Each door request switch operation Operation condition A

• Selective unlock function is not operating
B
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area*
• Vehicle speed: 0 km/h
Unlock • Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle C
(One touch unlock function is setting in OFF)
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area*
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different. D

The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function E
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
ever, this operating range depends on the ambient conditions.
F
JMKIA4534ZZ H
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH)
Lock Operation
I
When lock signal is sent from door request switch, all doors are locked.
Unlock Operation
• When unlock signal from front door request switch (driver side) is transmitted, driver door unlocks. When J
front door request switch (driver side) is operated again within 60* seconds, passenger door and rear door
unlock.
• When unlock signal from front door request switch (passenger side) is transmitted, passenger door unlock.
DLK
When front door request switch (passenger side) is operated again within 60* seconds, all doors unlocks.
*
: Default value is 60 seconds. This time changes according to auto door lock function operation time.
How to Change Selective Unlock Function Operation Mode L
Selective unlock function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
REMINDER FUNCTION (DOOR REQUEST SWITCH) M
When doors are locked or unlocked by door request switch, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a reminder
and transmits Intelligent Key warning buzzer request signal to Intelligent Key warning buzzer or horn reminder
signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication. Reminder function does not operate if ignition switch in ON posi- N
tion. The reminder function has C mode and S mode.
Operation C mode S mode

O
Door request switch Lock Unlock Lock Unlock
Hazard warning lamp Twice Once Twice –
Intelligent Key warning P
Twice Once – –
buzzer*1
Horn*2 Once – – –
*1
: Work support mode [ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK] setting is [BUZZER]
*2
: Work support mode [ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK] setting is [HORN]
DLK-663
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
When lock and unlock signal are sent from the Intelligent Key for more than 4 seconds at the same time, the
hazard and buzzer reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp blinks and horn sounds as per the fol-
lowing items:
JMKIB1365GB

After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 60 seconds or more passes without performing
vate.


Hazard warning lamp
Outside key antenna
Door request switch
Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Door lock actuator
Door lock function

Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM

Reminder function × × × ×
Door lock status indicator operation ×
Selective unlock function × × × × × ×
DLK-664
JMKIB3635GB F

G
bumper) and inside key antenna and transmits the request signal to the Intelligent Key. And then, check that H
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver. I
OPERATION CONDITION J

DLK
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna (rear bumper) detection area*
L
*
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA M
door opener switch . However, this operating range depends on N
P
JMKIA1955ZZ

DLK-665


Inside key antenna
Function
Back door switch

Intelligent Key
BCM

JMKIB3636GB
OPERATION
• Selective unlock function
• Panic alarm
• Reminder function
• Auto door lock
• Door lock status indicator operation
OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each doors, however the opera-
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal is transmitted
from Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM lock/unlock each door lock actuator, when key ID matches.
OPERATION CONDITION
DLK-666
operated. A
Intelligent Key button opera-

Operation condition
tion
B
Lock P position warning is not activated
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION (INTELLIGENT KEY)

C
Lock Operation
When lock signal is sent from Intelligent Key, all doors are locked.
Unlock Operation D
When unlock signal from Intelligent Key is transmitted, driver door are unlocked. When unlock signal is trans-
mitted from Intelligent Key within 60* seconds again, passenger door and rear doors are unlocked.
* E
: Default value is 60 seconds. This time changes according to auto lock function operation time.
How to Change Selective Unlock Function Operation Mode
Selective unlock function operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-676, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 5)". F
PANIC ALARM FUNCTION
When ignition switch is OFF, BCM transmits theft warning horn request signal to IPDM E/R. Then, IPDM E/R
turns on and off horn intermittently. G
The horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off.
• After 25 seconds H
• When BCM receives any signal from Intelligent Key
After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 60 seconds or more passes without performing I
• Door switch is ON (door is open) J

Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK- DLK
• Door lock status indicator turns indicator lamp ON or OFF and indicates door lock or unlock state. L
REMINDER FUNCTION
M
a reminder and transmits horn reminder signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication. The reminder function
has C mode and S mode. N
Operation C mode S mode

Intelligent Key Operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock O
Hazard warning lamp blinks Twice One Twice –
Horn sound One – – –
P
Operation Condition
• Reminder function does not operate if ignition switch in ON position.
• When any door is open, reminder function does not operate according to door lock operation.
With CONSULT
DLK-667
Without CONSULT
When lock and unlock signal are sent from the Intelligent Key for more than 4 seconds at the same time, the
hazard and buzzer reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp blinks and horn sounds as per the fol-
lowing items:
JMKIB1365GB


Hazard warning lamp

Combination meter
Door lock actuator
Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
Reminder function × × × × × ×
Selective unlock function × × × × × ×

JMKIB3319GB
DLK-668
Key remainder function Operation condition Operation A

When all doors other than driver door are locked, driver door locks within
Driver door closed* All doors unlock
0.2 seconds after driver door is closed
When all of the following conditions are satisfied B
• Locked all doors with door lock and unlock switch
Door is open to closed • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• [Any door: open] → [all doors: closed]
ing buzzer
• Registered Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
C
When all of the following conditions are satisfied • All doors unlock
• [Back door: Open] → [Back door: closed] • Back door can open with
Back door is closed • All doors (except for back door): closed back door opener switch
• All doors (except for back door): locked • Honk Intelligent Key warn- D
• Registered Intelligent Key is inside vehicle ing buzzer
accidentally but unlock operation is perform in these cases. E
CAUTION:
ligent Key is on the instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system some- F
WARNING FUNCTION
G
OPERATION DESCRIPTION H
The warning function are as per the following items and are given to the user as warning information and
I
• Intelligent Key system malfunction
• Take away warning J
• Door lock operation warning
• Intelligent Key low battery warning DLK
• Key ID verification information
• Key ID warning
L
OPERATION CONDITION
M
When condition A or B is satisfied N
• Condition A
• Condition B
- Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while O
brake pedal is depressed and ignition switch is LOCK or OFF (When the In-
P
• Shift position: Except P position
For internal
DLK-669
Door status changes
from open to close
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle during Key ID ver-
• Press push-button ignition switch
switch operation
sition
ON position
Engine start information
NOTE:
sition to OFF position
again.
Intelligent Key low battery warning BCM detects that Intelligent Key is low battery, after ignition switch is turned ON
Key ID warning
WARNING METHOD
Warning chime
buzzer ing buzzer
Key System Error

al
JMKIB1526ZZ
DLK-670
Warning chime
buzzer ing buzzer
B
P position warn- For internal Shift to Park Activate — C

ing
JMKIB1527ZZ D
Door is open to
close
Activate Activate E
Take away
No Key Detected
warning F
Push-ignition
Activate —
switch operation
JMKIB1526ZZ
G
H
— — —
els)
I
JMKIB1396ZZ

— — — DLK
els)
JMKIB3307ZZ L
M
N
JMKIB1529ZZ
Key ID verification information — — —

P
JMKIB1399ZZ
DLK-671
Warning chime
buzzer ing buzzer
JMKIB1401ZZ
JMKIB1526ZZ



Function Outside key antenna

Door request switch
Inside key antenna
Steering lock unit

Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
P position warning × × × × ×
Take away warning
× × × × × × ×
operation
Steering lock information × × × ×
Key ID warning × × × × ×
DLK-672
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
JMKIA6011GB

NOTE:
OPERATION CONDITION
I
Back door open J
NOTE:
open. DLK
in unlock state.
DLK-673
COMMON ITEM
APPLICATION ITEM

Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
NOTE:
×: Applicable item
Diagnosis mode
NVIS - NATS IMMU ×
RAP RETAINED PWR ×

CONSULT.
DLK-674

B
NOTE:
VEHICLE COND —
C
NOTE:
POWER SUPPLY
COUNTER
DOOR LOCK
E

CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM. F
WORK SUPPORT
G
Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
H
Automatic door unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
AUTO UNLOCK TYPE • MODE1: All doors are locked
• MODE2: Only driver door is unlocked I
Automatic door lock function mode can be selected from the following in the mode
• MODE1: All doors are locked when vehicle speed more than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
• MODE 2*: All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from P position to other than the J
AUTO LOCK FUNCTION
P position
DLK
Automatic door unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
• MODE1: All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF
AUTO UNLOCK FUNCTION • MODE 2*: All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than
the P to P position L
Signature light function can be changed to operation with this mode M
*
: P range interlock door lock/unlock can be selected for M/T models, but automatic door lock/unlock function N
does not operate.
DATA MONITOR
NOTE: O
P
DLK-675
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
SHOCK SENSOR unit.)
NOTE:
KEY SW
ACTIVE TEST

INTELLIGENT KEY
INFOID:0000000010672316
WORK SUPPORT

mode
• On: Operate
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
NOTE:
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec
AUTO LOCK SET
NOTE:
DLK-676
A
Reminder function (door request switch and Intelligent Key) mode can be selected from the B
following with this mode
ANSWER BACK
• On: S mode (buzzer or horn reminder non-operation)
• Off: C mode (buzzer or horn operate)
C
Reminder function (door request switch) mode can be selected from the following with this
mode
ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UN- • BUZZER: Sound Intelligent Key warning buzzer
LOCK • HORN: Sound horn D
• Off: Only hazard warning lamp operate
• INVALID: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
Reminder function (Intelligent Key) mode can be selected from the following with this mode E
• On: Horn and hazard warning lamp operate
UNLOCK
SELF-DIAG RESULT F
DATA MONITOR
NOTE: G
H
REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side) I
J

DLK
START CLUTCH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch pedal position switch L
NEUTRAL SW - IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of park/neutral position switch
M
N
ST/INHIRELAY-IPDM
tion O
IS STATUS - ECM Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop/start system P
DLK-677
NOTE:
BK DOOR STATE
NOTE:
PRMT RKE STRT
I-KEY OK FLAG
vehicle
unnecessary
CRNK PRBT TMR
function operation
NOTE:
SHORT CRANK
RKE OPE COUN1
NOTE:
RKE OPE COUN2
S/L LOCK REQ Indicates [On/Off] condition of steering lock unit lock request signal
VEH SPEED ERROR (S/L) Indicates [On/Off] condition of vehicle speed signal
S/L LOCK NOT PERMIT Indicates [Inhibition/No inhbt] condition of inhibit steering lock
DLK-678
A
S/L LOCK POSITION (CAN) Indicates [Armed/Malf/Unlocked/Undefined] condition of lock/unlock position signal
S/L HI-LEVEL MALFUNC (CAN) Indicates [Malf/No malf] condition of hi-level malfunction B
S/L SENSOR POWER (CAN) Indicates [On/Off] condition of sensor test power supply C
D
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key E
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD F
RKE-PANIC Indicates [On/Off] condition of PANICE ALARM signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key
G
NOTE:
RKE PBD
NOTE: H
KEY SW
NOTE:
IGN SW
I
NOTE:
START SW
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models. J

ACTIVE TEST
DLK
This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation
OUTSIDE BUZZER • On: Operate L
• Buzzer 1: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipi...) when CONSULT screen is touched M
• Buzzer 3: Combination meter buzzer sounds (pipipipi-pipipipi-...) when CONSULT screen is
touched N
• KEY ON:[ Intelligent key system malfunction] displays when CONSULT screen is touched O
INDICATOR
This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation
FLASHER P
This test is able to check horn operation
HORN
• On: Operates
DLK-679
NOTE:
MIRROR +5
This test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
cation
NOTE:
IGNITION RELAY
NOTE:
ENGINE START
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR
NOTE:
REVERSE LAMP TEST
NOTE:
KEYFOB P/W TEST
NOTE:
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR
This test is able to check trunk room lamp operation
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
TRUNK
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

NOTE:
DLK-680
A
NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW B
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
BACK DOOR OEPENR SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch C
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
D
DLK
DLK-681
BCM

BCM
ECU Reference
BCS-87, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-89, "DTC Index"
DLK-682
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM A
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
LHD
B
DLK
JRKWE3958GB
DLK-683
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3959GB
DLK-684
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3960GB
DLK-685
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3961GB
DLK-686
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3962GB
DLK-687
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3963GB
DLK-688
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3964GB
DLK-689
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3965GB
DLK-690
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3966GB
DLK-691
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3967GB
DLK-692
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3968GB
DLK-693
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3969GB
DLK-694
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3970GB
P
RHD
DLK-695
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3984GB
DLK-696
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3985GB
DLK-697
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3986GB
DLK-698
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3987GB
DLK-699
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3988GB
DLK-700
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3989GB
DLK-701
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3990GB
DLK-702
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3991GB
DLK-703
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3992GB
DLK-704
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3993GB
DLK-705
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3994GB
DLK-706
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3995GB
DLK-707
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3996GB
DLK-708
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
DLK
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-709

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
- Erase DTC.
>> GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 6.
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 7.
SULT.
DLK-710
YES >> GO TO 8.

C
ment.
D
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
DLK
DLK-711
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT display
description

KEY”.

DLK-712
(+) A
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
B
When Intelligent Key is not in C

JMMIA1652GB
D
116
E
F
JMMIA1653GB
M69 Ground
G

the antenna detection area H
JSMIA1348GB
117 I
J
DLK
JSMIA1406GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
N
Continuity
O
116 2
M69 M73 Existed
117 1
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. P
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
116
M69 Not existed
117
DLK-713
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

JMMIA1652GB
116

JMMIA1653GB
M69 Ground

JSMIA1348GB
117

JSMIA1406GB

DLK-714
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B
CONSULT display
description C
room) circuit is open or shorted] D

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT F
KEY”.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected? G
H
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 I

J
DLK
DLK-715
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

JMMIA1652GB
22 Ground

JMMIA1653GB
B4

JSMIA1507GB
23 Ground

JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
nector.

Continuity
22 2
B4 B53 Existed
23 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
22
B4 Not existed
23
DLK-716

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 B
C
(+) D
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
E
When Intelligent Key is not in the F

G
JMMIA1652GB
22 Ground
H
I
JMMIA1653GB
B4
J

DLK
JSMIA1507GB L
23 Ground
M
N
JSMIA1506GB

O
DLK-717
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status


(+)
Connector Terminal
Back door
opener switch
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
B3 121 B2 1 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B3 121 Not existed

DLK-718

Continuity
B2 2 Existed
B
C
DLK
DLK-719
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Pressed ON
Released OFF

(+)
Connector Terminal
D94 1 Ground 9 - 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
nector.

Continuity
B4 16 D94 1 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B4 16 Not existed
DLK-720

Continuity
D94 4 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H

Terminal

1 4 J
DLK-721
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Pressed On
Released Off

(+)
Connector Terminal
D94 2 Ground 9 - 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
nector.

Continuity
B4 6 D94 2 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B4 6 Not existed
DLK-722

Continuity
D94 3 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H

Terminal
Pressed Existed
2 3 Back door request switch J
DLK-723
1.CHECK FUNCTION
3. Touch “Buzzer 1”, “Buzzer 2” or “Buzzer 3” to check that it works normally.
No >> Refer to DLK-724, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK METER BUZZER CIRCUIT

Yes >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-724
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
E

LHD models
(+)
I
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
J
2 Unlock
3 Lock
RHD models DLK

(+)
(driver side) L
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
D25 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 9 – 16 V M
3 Lock
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side). N
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.
LHD models P
Continuity
141 3
M68 D1 Existed
148 2
DLK-725
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
RHD models
Continuity
141 3
M68 D25 Existed
148 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
141
M68 Not existed
148
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
141 Lock
148 Unlock
PASSENGER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK

DLK-726
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
LHD models
(+) A
(passenger side)
2 Unlock
3 Lock
C
RHD models
(+)
Front door lock assembly D
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock E
3 Lock
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (passenger side). F
NO >> GO TO 2.
ness connector. H
LHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal I
139 2
M68 D25 Existed
141 3
J
RHD models
Continuity
DLK
139 2
M68 D1 Existed
141 3
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. L
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal M
Ground
139
M68 Not existed
141
N
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. P
DLK-727
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+)
Connector Terminal
139 Unlock
141 Lock
REAR LH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK

(+)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
124 2
B3 D51 Existed
125 3
DLK-728
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed B
125
YES >> GO TO 3. C
1. Connect BCM connector. D
(+) E
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
F
125 Lock
REAR RH H
1.CHECK FUNCTION I

2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. J
Monitor item Status

DLK
ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
M

N
O
(+)
P
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-729
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Continuity
124 2
B3 D64 Existed
125 3
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock
DLK-730
A
DRIVER SIDE
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON
G

I
LHD models
(+)
Power window main switch (–) Voltage J
Connector Terminal
3
D10 Ground 9 - 16 V
15 DLK
RHD models
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
3 M
D30 Ground 9 - 16 V
15
N
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT O
LHD models P
Continuity
50 3
M70 D10 Existed
80 15
DLK-731
RHD models
Continuity
50 3
M70 D30 Existed
80 15
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed
80
PASSENGER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON

LHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
1
D37 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
DLK-732
RHD models
(+) A
Connector Terminal
1
B
D7 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT D
ness connector. E
LHD models
Continuity F
50 1
M70 D37 Existed
80 2 G
LHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
50 1
M70 D7 Existed
80 2
I
BCM
Continuity J
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed
80 DLK
NO >> Repair or replace harness. L

Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". M
DOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Removal and Installation". N
DLK-733
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ON Turns ON
OFF Turns OFF

(+)
Connector Terminal
NO >> GO TO 2.
BCM Indicator unit

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
M69 111 Not existed
DLK-734
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B

Pressed ON D
Released OFF
Pressed ON
Released OFF
G
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front outside handle assembly connector. H
3. Check voltage between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly harness connector and ground.
LHD models
(+) I
Connector Terminal
J
Driver side D8
3 Ground 9 – 16 V
Passenger side D38
RHD models DLK

(+)
L
Connector Terminal
Driver side D39
3 Ground 9 – 16 V
Passenger side D9 M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector. O
2. Check continuity between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly harness connector and BCM har-
ness connector.
LHD models
P
Continuity
Driver side D8 105
3 M69 Existed
DLK-735
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
RHD models
Continuity
Driver side D39 105
3 M69 Existed
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly harness connector and ground.
LHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D8
3 Not existed
Passenger side D38
RHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D39
3 Not existed
Passenger side D9
Check continuity between malfunctioning front outside handle assembly harness connector and ground.
LHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D8
4 Existed
Passenger side D38
RHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D39
4 Existed
Passenger side D9
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning outside handle grip.
>> INSPECTION END


DLK-736
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch terminals. A

Terminal B
Pressed Existed
C
D
DLK
DLK-737
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
MONITOR” mode.

Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off

LHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B55
Passenger side B92
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
RHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92
Passenger side B55
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
DLK-738
DOOR SWITCH
NO >> GO TO 2.
C
LHD models
Door switch BCM
Continuity
D
Driver side B55 17
Rear RH B93 10
Back door B2 11
F
RHD models
Door switch BCM
Continuity
Driver side B92 17
H
Rear RH B93 10
Back door B2 11 I
LHD models
Door switch J
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B55
DLK
Rear RH B93 L
Back door B2
RHD models
M
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92 N
Rear RH B93 O
Back door B2
DLK-739
DOOR SWITCH

Continuity
B2 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Door switch
Terminal
Pressed Existed
Driver side
Pressed Existed
Passenger side
3 Door switch
Rear LH
Pressed Existed
Rear RH

Back door 3 4
DLK-740
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
Monitor item Status

E
F

tion" (halogen headlamp models). H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EXL-146, "Symptom Table" (LED headlamp models) and EXL-303, "Symptom Table" I
J
>> INSPECTION END DLK
DLK-741
INFORMATION DISPLAY
INFORMATION DISPLAY
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER

Refer to MWI-28, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END
DLK-742
A


E
OCC0607D
DLK
DLK-743
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ON Buzzer sounds

(+)
Connector Terminal
buzzer
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
BCM
Continuity
E60 164 Not existed
DLK-744
Intelligent Key warning buzzer A

Continuity
E7 3 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> Replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
E
DLK
DLK-745
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
DRIVER SIDE

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1406GB
M69

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front outside handle assembly (driver side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front outside handle assembly (driver side) har-
ness connector.
DLK-746
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
LHD models
BCM Front outside handle assembly (driver side) A
Continuity
100 1
M69 D8 Existed B
120 2
RHD models
BCM Front outside handle assembly (driver side)
Continuity C
100 1
M69 D39 Existed
120 2 D
BCM E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
100
M69 Not existed F
120
YES >> GO TO 3. G
H
1. Replace front outside handle assembly (driver side). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and front outside handle assembly (driver side) connector.
I
DLK
DLK-747
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1406GB
M69

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

PASSENGER SIDE

DLK-748
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
(+) A
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
B

C
detection area

D
ON
E
tection area
F
JSMIA1506GB
M69
G

is not in the antenna H
detection area

119 Ground and any door switch is I
ON
When Intelligent Key J

tection area
DLK
JSMIA1506GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT M
1. Disconnect BCM connector and front outside handle assembly (passenger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front outside handle assembly (passenger side)
harness connector.
N
LHD models
Continuity
118 2
M69 D38 Existed
119 1
RHD models
P
Continuity
118 2
M69 D9 Existed
119 1
DLK-749
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
118
M69 Not existed
119
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Replace front outside handle assembly (passenger side). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and front outside handle assembly (passenger side) connector.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB
M69

detection area

ON

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

REAR BUMPER
DLK-750
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. B
(+)
Signal C
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

E
detection area
JMMIA1652GB
21 F
When Intelligent Key G

tection area
H
ON
I
detection area J
JSMIA1507GB
24
DLK

is in the antenna de- L
tection area
JSMIA1506GB M
NO >> GO TO 2. N

1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector. O
nector.
P
Continuity
21 2
B4 B52 Existed
24 1
DLK-751
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
BCM
Ground
21
B4 Not existed
24
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

detection area
JMMIA1652GB
21

tection area

ON

detection area
JSMIA1507GB
24

tection area
JSMIA1506GB

DLK-752
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SWITCH
B
ALL DOOR
C
D
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
YES >> GO TO 4. DLK
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5. M
5.REPLACE BCM
N
O
FRONT DOOR P

DLK-753
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
REAR DOOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE

DLK-754
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
C
PASSENGER SIDE
E
F

G
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM I
REAR LH DLK
L
M
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR RH
DLK-755

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-756
A
B
C
Check remote keyless entry function. D
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Select “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. F
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA H

• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-74, "DTC Logic". I
YES >> GO TO 4.
J
Check outside key antenna. DLK
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-107, "REAR BUMPER : Diagnosis Procedure". L
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. N
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-44, "Intermittent Incident". O
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010672382 P

DLK-757
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010672384
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010672385

Check passenger side door request switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM


DLK-758
YES >> GO TO 2. A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM D
Is the result normal? E
F
DLK
DLK-759
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY

Does the Intelligent Key belong to the vehicle to checked?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING
Is the Intelligent Key low battery warning operated?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-2 >> Without another registered Intelligent Key: GO TO 4.
Key.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 7.
While depressing the brake pedal, contact the backside of the Intelligent Key that cannot be used to perform
Is the vehicle in START status?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY
for damage.
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
Does door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
DLK-760
YES >> GO TO 9. A
B
C
D
DLK
DLK-761

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-762
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM B

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION D
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
F
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE BCM H
Is the result normal? I
J
DLK
DLK-763
IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK “AUTO UNLOCK FUNCTION” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

2. Select “AUTO UNLOCK FUNCTION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTO UNLOCK FUNCTION” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “MODE 1” in “AUTO UNLOCK FUNCTION”.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-764
A
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B

3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
2.REPLACE BCM
E
F
DLK
DLK-765

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DLK-766
A

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

NO >> GO TO 1. F
DLK
DLK-767

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE BCM
DLK-768
P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
A
ERATE
B
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK FUNCTION” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
C
2. Select “AUTO LOCK FUNCTION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTO LOCK FUNCTION” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “MODE 2” in “AUTO LOCK FUNCTION”.
E
2.CHECK “AUTO UNLOCK FUNCTION” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
2. Select “AUTO UNLOCK FUNCTION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. F
3. Check “AUTO UNLOCK FUNCTION” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “MODE 2” in “AUTO UNLOCK FUNCTION”.
3.REPLACE BCM H
Is the result normal? I
J
DLK
DLK-769
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM, TCM AND COMBINATION METER

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
DLK-770
REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000010683773
B
Reminder function does not operate using door request switch.
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010683774
C
Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter. D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-89, "DTC Index". (BCM) E
2.CHECK “ANSWER BACK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT. F
2. Select “ANSWER BACK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check the “ANSWER BACK” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-676, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) (Type 5)". G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “Off” in “ANSWER BACK”. H
3.CHECK “ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
2. Select “ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. I
3. Check the “ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set “BUZZER”, “HORN” or “Off” in “ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK”.
4.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION DLK

Refer to DLK-741, "Component Function Check". L
YES >> GO TO 5.
Refer to DLK-744, "Component Function Check". N
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK HORN FUNCTION
Check horn function. P
Refer to SEC-173, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
DLK-771
INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : Description INFOID:0000000010683775
Reminder function does not operate using Intelligent Key.

INTELLIGENT KEY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010683776

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “Off” in “ANSWER BACK”.
3.CHECK “ANSWER BACK KEYLESS LOCK UNLOCK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
2. Select “ANSWER BACK KEYLESS LOCK UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check the “ANSWER BACK KEYLESS LOCK UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set “On” or “Off” in “ANSWER BACK KEYLESS LOCK UNLOCK”.
4.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION
YES >> GO TO 5.
Check horn function.
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE BCM
DLK-772
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A

3. Check “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “On” in “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET”.
2.REPLACE BCM
E
F
DLK
DLK-773

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DLK-774
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 3.
Refer to DLK-99, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch. I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer. DLK
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA M
N
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE BCM
DLK-775
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK FUNCTION” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”

2. Select “AUTO LOCK FUNCTION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTO LOCK FUNCTION” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “MODE 1” in “AUTO LOCK FUNCTION”.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-776
A
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of H
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). I
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
defining the noise.
DLK
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand) N
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise) O
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending up on the person. A noise that you may judge P
DLK-777
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear and mechanics stethoscope).
porarily.
noise.
REPAIR THE CAUSE
- Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
Department.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/76884-
71L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/73982-
50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
DLK-778
SILICONE GREASE A
SILICONE SPRAY
B
DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR C
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000010672403 D

INSTRUMENT PANEL E
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing F
G
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint H
wiring harness. I
CAUTION:
will not be able to recheck the repair. J
CENTER CONSOLE
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher DLK
L
DOORS
Pay attention to the: M
3. Wiring harnesses tapping N
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from O
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put intothe trunk by the owner. P
DLK-779
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knockingnoise
SEATS
noise.
tions under which the noise occurs.Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or onthe engine wall. The noise is then
DLK-780
DLK
PIIB8740E
P
DLK-781
PIIB8742E
DLK-782
HOOD
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

HOOD
B
DLK
N
JMKIB3292ZZ

O
P
: Clip
: Pawl
: Body grease
HOOD ASSEMBLY
DLK-783
HOOD
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING:
hood assembly.
2. Remove hood hinge mounting nuts, and then remove hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000010678776
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK-784
HOOD
DLK
L
JMKIB4355GB
1. Hood assembly 2. Front combination lamp 3. Front fender assembly M

: Vehicle front
N
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
:Body grease
O
shown below. P
DLK-785
HOOD
Unit: mm [in]
Difference
MAX)
4.0 – 9.0 ≤ 3.0
C Clearance
A–A
lamp 0.0
D Surface height —
[0.000]
E Clearance * —
Hood – Front fender B–B ≤ 3.0
[0.118]

2. Remove hood lock assembly.
4. Loosen hood hinge mounting bolts.
for looseness.
HOOD HINGE
REMOVAL
2. Remove upper mounting bolt of front fender assembly. Refer to DLK-792, "Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
DLK-786
HOOD
A
B
: Body grease
D
JMKIB2933ZZ
HOOD SUPPORT ROD

E
REMOVAL F
CAUTION:
1. Support hood assembly with a suitable material to prevent it from falling. G
WARNING:
hood assembly. H
INSTALLATION I
HOOD INSULATOR
J
REMOVAL DLK
L
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. M
DLK-787
MR20DD
MR20DD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010678783
T/M models
JMKIB3632GB

:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
DLK-788
CVT models
A
H
JMKIB3633GB

4. Air guide LH 5. Air guide plate I
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

J
REMOVAL
DLK
"Exploded View".
P
INSTALLATION
R9M
DLK-789
T/M models
JMKIB3299GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
CVT models
JMKIB3300GB
DLK-790

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
B
REMOVAL C
E
"Exploded View".
F
11. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support upper. H
INSTALLATION
I
DLK
DLK-791
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3315GB

: Pawl
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
tion".
DLK-792
FRONT FENDER
outside.
: Vehicle front
B
JMKIA5633ZZ
D
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
bolts. G
DLK
DLK-793
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3248GB

: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-794
FRONT DOOR
ment".
B
C
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
D
DLK
JMKIB3256GB
P
DLK-795
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
H Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
I
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

sion.
CAUTION:
and nuts.
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
DOOR HINGE
REMOVAL
DLK-796
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
INSTALLATION C
CAUTION:
ment". E
F
: Body grease
H
JMKIB0321ZZ
J
DOOR CHECK LINK
DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION O
CAUTION:
DLK-797
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
DLK-798
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
A
I
JMKIB3250GB


: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY M
CAUTION: N
REMOVAL
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-799
REAR DOOR
ment".
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
JMKIB3256GB

DLK-800
REAR DOOR

A
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in] C
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance D
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
3.5 – 5.5
L Clearance
[0.138 – 0.217]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0) F
M
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

CAUTION:
and nuts.
tion". DLK
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: O
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
DLK-801
REAR DOOR
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Body grease
JMKIB0329ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
DOOR CHECK LINK

REMOVAL
DLK-802
REAR DOOR
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: B
: Body grease E
JMKIB0322ZZ
G
DLK
DLK-803
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3637GB

A. Center mark
B. Seam
: Body grease
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
DLK-804
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
Installation".
lation". B
C
WARNING: D
back door stay.
tion". E
INSTALLATION F
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
Inspection".
I
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK
DLK-805
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3321GB

: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-806
BACK DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
Portion Standard
(RH/LH,MAX)
5.0 – 7.0
D Clearance — B
[0.197 – 0.276]
Surface 0 – 2.0
E —
height [0 – 0.079]
C
2.8 – 7.2 < 2.9
F Clearance
[0.110 – 0.283] [0.114]
Surface 0 – 4.0 < 2.5 D
G
height [0 – 0.157] [0.098]
4.8 – 9.2
[0.189 – 0.362]

CAUTION: H
Inspection".
BACK DOOR STRIKER
DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
BACK DOOR HINGE O
P
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
DLK-807
BACK DOOR
CAUTION:
Inspection".
Adjustment".
: Body grease
JMKIB0628ZZ
BACK DOOR STAY

REMOVAL
WARNING:
back door stay.
CAUTION:
JMKIA2255ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
DLK-808
BACK DOOR
CAUTION: A
B
JMKIA3336ZZ
D
E
A : 20 mm (0.787 in)
F
G
JMKIA3609ZZ

H
REMOVAL I
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: L
DLK-809
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
LHD models
JMKIB3309GB
: Clip
: Body grease
DLK-810
HOOD LOCK
RHD models
A
I
JMKIB3308GB
J
: Clip

: Body grease L
HOOD LOCK
REMOVAL
core support upper.
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
DLK-811
HOOD LOCK
REMOVAL
• LHD models
JMKIB0324ZZ
• RHD models
JMKIB0327ZZ
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
and Installation".
ment.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-812
HOOD LOCK
PIIB5801E
D
ment".
HOOD SAFETY HOOK
F
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: H
I
NOTE:
assembly.
CAUTION:
L
M
N
: Body grease
P
JMKIB1164ZZ
DLK-813
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3253GB

: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease

DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
Installation".
DLK-814
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
D
necessary.
E
: Body grease
G
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
H
REMOVAL I
rate inside handle.
DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
NOTE: O
screen is reused.
DLK-815
FRONT DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIB2462ZZ

JMKIA8374ZZ
JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-816
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5890ZZ
D
CAUTION: E
G
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
DLK
DLK-817
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3255GB

: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
DLK-818
REAR DOOR LOCK
INSTALLATION B
CAUTION:
D
necessary. E
: Body grease
F
JMKIA8534ZZ
H
INSIDE HANDLE
I
REMOVAL
J
rate inside handle.
DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE M
N
REMOVAL
NOTE:
P
screen is reused.
DLK-819
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIB2478ZZ

JMKIB2479ZZ

JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-820
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5890ZZ
D
CAUTION: E
G
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
DLK
DLK-821
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3271GB

: Body grease
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-822
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
necessary.
B
: Body grease
D
JMKIB0629ZZ
DLK
DLK-823
LHD models
JMKIB3264ZZ
: Clip
: Pawl
DLK-824
RHD models
A
DLK
JMKIB3263ZZ
: Clip
: Pawl
M
FUEL FILLER LID

N
REMOVAL O
DLK-825
JMKIB3183ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Unit: mm [in]
Clearance Evenness
3.7 – 5.3 (-1.0) – (+1.0)
(0.146 – 0.209) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
REMOVAL
assembly.
NOTE:
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
JMKIB1094ZZ

JMKIA5719ZZ
DLK-826
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
C
REMOVAL
LHD models
G
JMKIA5901ZZ
lation".
DLK
RHD models
O
JMKIA5672ZZ
Installation".
DLK-827
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-828
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
E
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-829
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
CONSOLE
REMOVAL
JMKIB3257ZZ
INSTALLATION
LUGGAGE ROOM
REMOVAL
(luggage room) .
JMKIB3258ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-830
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
OUTSIDE HANDLE
B
REMOVAL
C
INSTALLATION
REAR BUMPER D
REMOVAL E
F
JMKIB3259ZZ
I
INSTALLATION
J
DLK
DLK-831
REMOVAL
JMKIB2758ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK-832
A

lower part.
CAUTION:
PIIB6221E
F

(CR2032)
CAUTION:
J
PIIB6222E DLK
DLK-833
APPLICATION NOTICE

APPLICATION NOTICE

• For Europe
• For Europe
• For Australia
• For Australia
DLK-834
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
connectors. G
WARNING: H
serious injury.
windshield.
L
PIIB3706J N
P
DLK-835
PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
NOTE:
SEF289H
NOTE:
1. Open the hood.

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Work INFOID:0000000011772976
operational.
DLK-836
PREPARATION
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

C
D
E
SIIA0995E
PIIB7923J
Power tool I
PIIB1407E J
DLK
DLK-837
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
JMKIB3273ZZ
1. Power window main switch 2. BCM 3. Combination meter

(door lock/unlock switch) Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL
tion"
4. Front power window switch (passen- 5. Door lock assembly 6. Door switch
ger side) (door lock and unlock
switch)
7. Back door lock assembly 8. Back door opener switch
Item Function
BCM
switch.
Combination meter
Door lock actuator
Door lock and unlock switch Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM.
Key switch
DLK-838
A
JMKIB2483GB F
G
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
H
locked. I
ator are unlocked.
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION J
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock /unlock state, refer to INL-8, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
DLK
When ignition switch is ON and BCM receives shock status signal, it operates automatically to unlock all
L
• While door lock and unlock switch is pressed in the lock direction, combination meter buzzer sounds and M
warns.
DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR OPERATION N

O
is locked
ON ON Door lock and unlock switch P
is locked
is locked tion
ON ON
is locked tion
DLK-839
ON → OFF – –
locked)
OFF → ON – –
(timer is stop)
tion
DLK-840
A
JMKIB3618GB F
G
BCM via remote keyless entry receiver. H
at the same time as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION I
Remote controller operation Operation condition J

Lock
Unlock Key switch is off DLK
OPERATION AREA
To ensure that the keyfob works effectively, use within 100 cm (3 ft) range of each door, however the operable L
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION
• When LOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob, all doors are locked. M
• When UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob once, driver side door is unlocked.
• Then, if UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob again, all other doors are unlocked.
N
With CONSULT
Selective unlock mode can be set to ON or OFF using CONSULT.
O
PANIC ALARM FUNCTION
When keyfob panic alarm button is pressed while ignition switch is OFF, BCM transmits theft warning horn
request signal to IPDM E/R. Then, IPDM E/R turns on and off horn intermittently.
The horn sounds intermittently. P
The alarm automatically turns off.
• After 25 seconds
• When BCM receives any signal from keyfob
REMINDER FUNCTION
When doors are locked or unlocked by keyfob, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a reminder and transmits
horn chirp signal to IPDM E/R. IPDM E/R sounds horn as a reminder.
DLK-841
The hazard and horn reminder has a horn chirp mode (C mode) and a non-horn chirp mode (S mode).
Operating Function of Hazard and Horn Reminder
C mode S mode
Back door Back door
Keyfob operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock
open open
Hazard warning lamp blinks Twice Once — Twice — —
Horn sound Once — — — — —
Hazard and horn reminder does not operate if ignition switch ON position.
How to change hazard and horn reminder mode
With CONSULT
Without CONSULT
When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the Intelligent Key for more than 2 seconds at the same time,
the hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp blinks and horn sounds as per the
following items:
JMKIB1365GB


DLK-842
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
JMKIA6011GB

NOTE:
OPERATION CONDITION
I
Back door open J
NOTE:
open. DLK
in unlock state.
DLK-843
COMMON ITEM
APPLICATION ITEM

Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION
NOTE:
×: Applicable item
Diagnosis mode
NVIS - NATS IMMU ×
RAP RETAINED PWR ×

CONSULT.
DLK-844

B
NOTE:
VEHICLE COND —
C
NOTE:
POWER SUPPLY
COUNTER
DOOR LOCK
E
WORK SUPPORT
F
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET • On: Operate G
DATA MONITOR H
NOTE:
I
IGN ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
J
KEY ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of key switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch DLK
L
BACK DOOR SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch M
LOCK STATUS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door driver side
ACC ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ACC position
KEYLESS LOCK Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from key fob N
KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from key fob
Indicates [NOMAL/On/Off] condition of circuit between BCM and air bag diag-
O
nosis sensor unit
• NORMAL: Ignition switch ON. (BCM is receiving normal condition signal
SHOCK SENSOR
from air bag diagnosis sensor unit.)
• ON: During the receiving of air bag signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit P
NOTE:
KEY CYL LK-SW
NOTE:
KEY CYL UN-SW
Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numer-
VEHICLE SPEED
ical value [Km/h]
DLK-845
ACTIVE TEST

• The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
DOOR LOCK • The door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked when “DR UNLK” on CONSULT screen is
touched
• “BD ULK” is displayed, but cannot be used
• “OTR ULK” is displayed, but cannot be used
MULTI REMOTE ENT

INFOID:0000000010738355
WORK SUPPORT

• MODE 2: 30 sec.
AUTO LOCK SET
Reminder function (keyfob) mode can be selected from the following with this mode
ANSWER BACK • On: S mode (horn non-operation)
• Off: C mode (horn operate)
Reminder function (keyfob) mode can be selected from the following with this mode
ANSWER BACK KEYLESS
• On: Horn and hazard warning lamp operate
LOCK UNLOCK
NOTE:
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

CONFRM ID ALL
CONFRM ID4
CONFRM ID3
cylinder.
CONFRM ID2
CONFRM ID1
NOT REGISTERED
TP 4
TP 3
TP 2
TP 1
DLK-846
A
START CLUTCH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch pedal position switch B
C
NOTE: D
BK DOOR STATE
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key E
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored F
NOTE:
RKE-PANIC
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from keyfob G
H
*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models.

*2: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF. I
ACTIVE TEST
J
FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/Off]
This test is able to check horn operation DLK
HORN
• On: Operates
L
NOTE:
MIRROR+5
M
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE:
RETRACTABLE MIRROR N
• Off: Non-operation O
• Off: Non-operation P
TRUNK/LUGGAGE LAMP
• On: Operates
TEST
TRUNK
DLK-847
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:

NOTE:
KEY CYL SW-TR
NOTE:
TR CANCEL SW
NOTE:
TRUNK LID OPENER SW
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
DLK-848
BCM

BCM
B
ECU Reference
C
BCS-87, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-89, "DTC Index"
DLK
DLK-849
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
WIRING DIAGRAM
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
LHD
JRKWE3958GB
DLK-850
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3959GB
DLK-851
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3960GB
DLK-852
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3961GB
DLK-853
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3962GB
DLK-854
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3963GB
DLK-855
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3964GB
DLK-856
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3965GB
DLK-857
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3966GB
DLK-858
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3967GB
DLK-859
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3968GB
DLK-860
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3969GB
DLK-861
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3970GB
RHD
DLK-862
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3984GB
P
DLK-863
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3985GB
DLK-864
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3986GB
DLK-865
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3987GB
DLK-866
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3988GB
DLK-867
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3989GB
DLK-868
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3990GB
DLK-869
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3991GB
DLK-870
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3992GB
DLK-871
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3993GB
DLK-872
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3994GB
DLK-873
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
JRKWE3995GB
DLK-874
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
DLK
JRKWE3996GB
DLK-875
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
DLK-876

B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC C
1. Check DTC.
- Erase DTC.
H
>> GO TO 5.
J
>> GO TO 6.
diagnosis order. L
NOTE:
M
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
YES >> GO TO 7.
SULT.
DLK-877
YES >> GO TO 8.
ment.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
DLK-878
A
Perform the system initialization when replacing BCM, replacing keyfob or registering an additional keyfob. B
DLK
DLK-879
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status


(+)
Connector Terminal
Back door
opener switch
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

Continuity
B3 121 B2 1 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B3 121 Not existed

DLK-880

Continuity
B2 2 Existed
B
C
DLK
DLK-881
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Pressed ON
Released OFF

(+)
Connector Terminal
D94 1 Ground 9 - 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
nector.

Continuity
B4 16 D94 1 Existed
BCM
Continuity
B4 16 Not existed
DLK-882

Continuity
D94 4 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
YES >> GO TO 5.

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
H

Terminal

1 4 J
DLK-883
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK

LHD models
(+)
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
RHD models
(+)
(driver side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
connector.
LHD models
Continuity
141 3
M68 D1 Existed
148 2
DLK-884
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
RHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side) A
Continuity
141 3
M68 D25 Existed B
148 2
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
141 D
M68 Not existed
148
YES >> GO TO 3. E
G
(+)
141 Lock
148 Unlock
I
J
PASSENGER SIDE
DLK
1.CHECK FUNCTION

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
N
O

DLK-885
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
LHD models
(+)
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
RHD models
(+)
(passenger side)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
ness connector.
LHD models
Continuity
139 2
M68 D25 Existed
141 3
RHD models
Continuity
139 2
M68 D1 Existed
141 3
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
139
M68 Not existed
141
YES >> GO TO 3.
DLK-886
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+) A
Connector Terminal
139 Unlock
B
141 Lock
REAR LH D
1.CHECK FUNCTION E

F
Monitor item Status

G
ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK
I

J
DLK
(+)
L
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock M
NO >> GO TO 2. N

Continuity P
124 2
B3 D51 Existed
125 3
DLK-887
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
124
B3 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock
REAR RH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Monitor item Status

ALL LOCK LOCK
ALL UNLOCK UNLOCK

(+)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
3 Lock
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-888
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT A

B
Continuity
124 2 C
B3 D64 Existed
125 3
D
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground E
124
B3 Not existed
125
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL G
H
(+)
I
Connector Terminal
124 Unlock
125 Lock J
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". DLK
DLK-889
DRIVER SIDE
1.CHECK FUNCTION

Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON

LHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
3
D10 Ground 9 - 16 V
15
RHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
3
D30 Ground 9 - 16 V
15
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
LHD models
Continuity
50 3
M70 D10 Existed
80 15
DLK-890
RHD models
BCM Power window main switch A
Continuity
50 3
M70 D30 Existed B
80 15
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50 D
M70 Not existed
80
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-135, "Removal and Installation". E
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-68, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : G
PASSENGER SIDE H
1.CHECK FUNCTION I

J

DLK
Lock ON
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Lock OFF L
CDL UNLOCK SW
Unlock ON
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch is OK. M
N

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O
LHD models P
(+)
Connector Terminal
1
D37 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
DLK-891
RHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
1
D7 Ground 9 - 16 V
2
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
ness connector.
LHD models
Continuity
50 1
M70 D37 Existed
80 2
RHD models
Continuity
50 1
M70 D7 Existed
80 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
50
M70 Not existed
80
DLK-892
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
Monitor item Status

ON Turns ON D
OFF Turns OFF
E
F

H
(+)
J
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
BCM Indicator unit
Continuity
BCM N
Continuity
M69 111 Not existed
O
DLK-893
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
MONITOR” mode.

Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off
Open On
Closed Off

LHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B55
Passenger side B92
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
RHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92
Passenger side B55
Rear RH B93
Back door B2
DLK-894
DOOR SWITCH
NO >> GO TO 2.
C
LHD models
Door switch BCM
Continuity
D
Driver side B55 17
Rear RH B93 10
Back door B2 11
F
RHD models
Door switch BCM
Continuity
Driver side B92 17
H
Rear RH B93 10
Back door B2 11 I
LHD models
Door switch J
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B55
DLK
Rear RH B93 L
Back door B2
RHD models
M
Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B92 N
Rear RH B93 O
Back door B2
DLK-895
DOOR SWITCH

Continuity
B2 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Door switch
Terminal
Pressed Existed
Driver side
Pressed Existed
Passenger side
3 Door switch
Rear LH
Pressed Existed
Rear RH

Back door 3 4
DLK-896
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
Monitor item Status

E
F

Refer to EXL-195, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description".
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EXL-303, "Symptom Table".
>> INSPECTION END J
DLK
DLK-897
KEY SWITCH
KEY SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select “KEY SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Inserted in key cylinder ON
KEY SW Keyfob
Removed from key cylinder OFF
YES >> Key switch is OK.
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect key switch connector.
3. Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground.
Key switch
Voltage
M47 1 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between key switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Key switch BCM

Continuity
3. Check continuity between key switch connector and ground.
Key switch
Continuity
M47 1 Not existed
Check continuity between key switch connector and ground.
Key switch
Continuity
M47 2 Existed
DLK-898
KEY SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 4 A
B
YES >> Replace ignition key cylinder. C
DLK
DLK-899
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY

current value becomes about 10 mA.

Is the measurement value within the specification?
NO >> Replace keyfob battery. Refer to DLK-509, "Removal
and Installation".
OCC0607D
DLK-900
A
FRONT DOOR
B
1.CHECK FUSE
C
D
Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2. Disconnect BCM connectors. F
(+) G
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
H
M68 143 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3. I
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. J
BCM
Continuity
Ground
146
M68 Existed
147
L
REAR DOOR
N
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuse is not fusing. O

Passenger door and rear door lock actuator power supply 31 (15 A) P
Is the fuse fusing?
NO >> GO TO 2.
DLK-901
(+)
BCM (−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M68 151 Ground 9 – 16 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
146
M68 Existed
147
DLK-902
UNLOCK SENSOR
UNLOCK SENSOR
A

LHD models
(+)
Connector Terminal
D1 5 Ground 9 – 16 V
E
RHD models
(+)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–) Voltage F
Connector Terminal
D25 4 Ground 9 – 16 V
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. H
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness I
connector.
LHD models
BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side) J
Continuity
DLK
RHD models
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal L
M
BCM
Continuity
N
M69 104 Not existed
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground. P
LHD models
Continuity
D1 4 Existed
DLK-903
UNLOCK SENSOR
LHD models
Continuity
D25 5 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



Terminal
Unlock Existed
Lock Not existed
DLK-904
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SWITCH
B
ALL DOOR
C
D
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
YES >> GO TO 4. DLK
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5. M
5.CHECK KEY SWITCH
N
Check key switch.
O
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE BCM P
FRONT DOOR
DLK-905

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
REAR DOOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DRIVER SIDE
DLK-906
A
B
C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
2.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE
G
H

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM DLK

REAR LH
N
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-907
REAR RH

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-908
A
1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION B

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY D
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE KEYFOB F
1. Replace keyfob.
Is the result normal? G
H
DLK
DLK-909

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK-910
A

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM D

NO >> GO TO 1. F
DLK
DLK-911

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
DLK-912
A
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH B

Check key switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH D

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
DLK
DLK-913

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “Off” in “ANSWER BACK”.
2.CHECK “ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
2. Select “ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check the “ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “HORN” or “Off” in “ANSWER BACK I-KEY LOCK UNLOCK”.
3.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check horn function.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM
DLK-914
A

YES >> GO TO 2 D
2.REPLACE BCM
E
F
DLK
DLK-915
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
defining the noise.
DLK-916
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
B
vehicle body.
porarily.
noise.
I
J
REPAIR THE CAUSE
Department. L
CAUTION:
NOTE:
76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/76884-
71L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in)
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/73982-
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
DLK-917
SILICONE GREASE
SILICONE SPRAY
DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

INSTRUMENT PANEL
wiring harness.
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
TRUNK
DLK-918
ing the noise. A
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
C
SEATS D
noise. E
UNDERHOOD
DLK-919
PIIB8740E
DLK-920
DLK
PIIB8742E
DLK-921
HOOD

HOOD
JMKIB3292ZZ

: Clip
: Pawl
: Body grease
HOOD ASSEMBLY
DLK-922
HOOD
A
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
WARNING: C
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: E
ment". F
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
H
DLK
DLK-923
HOOD
JMKIB4355GB

: Vehicle front
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
:Body grease

shown below.
DLK-924
HOOD
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
MAX)
4.0 – 9.0 ≤ 3.0 B
C Clearance
A–A
lamp 0.0
[0.000]
E Clearance * —
[0.118]
E
H
for looseness. I
J
HOOD HINGE DLK
L
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
P
DLK-925
HOOD
: Body grease
JMKIB2933ZZ
HOOD SUPPORT ROD

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
WARNING:
hood assembly.
INSTALLATION
HOOD INSULATOR
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
DLK-926
A
HRA2DDT
B
JMKIB3298GB
J
4. Air guide LH
DLK
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

L
REMOVAL
M
"Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
DLK-927
MR20DD
MR20DD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000010678852
T/M models
JMKIB3632GB

:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
DLK-928
CVT models
A
H
JMKIB3633GB

4. Air guide LH 5. Air guide plate I
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

J
REMOVAL
DLK
"Exploded View".
P
INSTALLATION
R9M
DLK-929
T/M models
JMKIB3299GB

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
CVT models
JMKIB3300GB
DLK-930

4. Air guide LH
:N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
B
REMOVAL C
E
"Exploded View".
F
11. Remove radiator core support upper mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support upper. H
INSTALLATION
I
DLK
DLK-931
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
JMKIB3315GB

: Pawl
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
tion".
DLK-932
FRONT FENDER
outside.
: Vehicle front
B
JMKIA5633ZZ
D
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
bolts. G
DLK
DLK-933
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
JMKIB3248GB

: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-934
FRONT DOOR
ment".
B
C
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
D
DLK
JMKIB3256GB
P
DLK-935
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in]
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
H Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
I
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

sion.
CAUTION:
and nuts.
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
DOOR HINGE
REMOVAL
DLK-936
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION:
tect door and body.
INSTALLATION C
CAUTION:
ment". E
F
: Body grease
H
JMKIB0321ZZ
J
DOOR CHECK LINK
DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION O
CAUTION:
DLK-937
FRONT DOOR
: Body grease
JMKIB0322ZZ
DLK-938
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
A
I
JMKIB3250GB


: Body grease
DOOR ASSEMBLY M
CAUTION: N
REMOVAL
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-939
REAR DOOR
ment".
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
JMKIB3256GB

DLK-940
REAR DOOR

A
: Body grease

shown below.
Unit: mm [in] C
Portion Standard
3.3 – 5.3
J Clearance D
[0.130 – 0.209]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0)
K
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]
E
3.5 – 5.5
L Clearance
[0.138 – 0.217]
Surface (−1.0) – (+1.0) F
M
height [(−0.039) – (+0.039)]

CAUTION:
and nuts.
tion". DLK
DOOR STRIKER
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: O
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
CAUTION:
DLK-941
REAR DOOR
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
: Body grease
JMKIB0329ZZ
: Body grease
JMKIB0321ZZ
DOOR CHECK LINK

REMOVAL
DLK-942
REAR DOOR
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: B
: Body grease E
JMKIB0322ZZ
G
DLK
DLK-943
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3637GB

A. Center mark
B. Seam
: Body grease
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

CAUTION:
DLK-944
BACK DOOR
REMOVAL
Installation".
lation". B
C
WARNING: D
back door stay.
tion". E
INSTALLATION F
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
Inspection".
I
FITTING ADJUSTMENT
DLK
DLK-945
BACK DOOR
JMKIB3321GB

: Body grease

shown below.
DLK-946
BACK DOOR
Unit: mm [in]
Difference A
Portion Standard
(RH/LH,MAX)
5.0 – 7.0
D Clearance — B
[0.197 – 0.276]
Surface 0 – 2.0
E —
height [0 – 0.079]
C
2.8 – 7.2 < 2.9
F Clearance
[0.110 – 0.283] [0.114]
Surface 0 – 4.0 < 2.5 D
G
height [0 – 0.157] [0.098]
4.8 – 9.2
[0.189 – 0.362]

CAUTION: H
Inspection".
BACK DOOR STRIKER
DLK
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
Adjustment".
BACK DOOR HINGE O
P
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
DLK-947
BACK DOOR
CAUTION:
Inspection".
Adjustment".
: Body grease
JMKIB0628ZZ
BACK DOOR STAY

REMOVAL
WARNING:
back door stay.
CAUTION:
JMKIA2255ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
DLK-948
BACK DOOR
CAUTION: A
B
JMKIA3336ZZ
D
E
A : 20 mm (0.787 in)
F
G
JMKIA3609ZZ

H
REMOVAL I
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: L
DLK-949
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
LHD models
JMKIB3309GB
: Clip
: Body grease
DLK-950
HOOD LOCK
RHD models
A
I
JMKIB3308GB
J
: Clip

: Body grease L
HOOD LOCK
REMOVAL
core support upper.
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ment".
DLK-951
HOOD LOCK
REMOVAL
• LHD models
JMKIB0324ZZ
• RHD models
JMKIB0327ZZ
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
and Installation".
ment.
CAUTION:
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-952
HOOD LOCK
PIIB5801E
D
ment".
HOOD SAFETY HOOK
F
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: H
I
NOTE:
assembly.
CAUTION:
L
M
N
: Body grease
P
JMKIB1164ZZ
DLK-953
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3253GB

: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease

DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
Installation".
DLK-954
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
D
necessary.
E
: Body grease
G
JMKIA8534ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
H
REMOVAL I
rate inside handle.
DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE
REMOVAL
NOTE: O
screen is reused.
DLK-955
FRONT DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIB2462ZZ

JMKIA8374ZZ

JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-956
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5890ZZ
D
CAUTION: E
G
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
DLK
DLK-957
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3255GB

: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Body grease
DOOR LOCK
REMOVAL
DLK-958
REAR DOOR LOCK
INSTALLATION B
CAUTION:
D
necessary. E
: Body grease
F
JMKIA8534ZZ
H
INSIDE HANDLE
I
REMOVAL
J
rate inside handle.
DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
OUTSIDE HANDLE M
N
REMOVAL
NOTE:
P
screen is reused.
DLK-959
REAR DOOR LOCK
escutcheon.
JMKIB2478ZZ

JMKIB2479ZZ

JMKIA0524ZZ
JMKIB1627ZZ
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DLK-960
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
: Vehicle front
JMKIA5890ZZ
D
CAUTION: E
G
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
DLK
DLK-961
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
JMKIB3271GB

: Body grease
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-962
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
necessary.
B
: Body grease
D
JMKIB0629ZZ
DLK
DLK-963
LHD models
JMKIB3264ZZ
: Clip
: Pawl
DLK-964
RHD models
A
DLK
JMKIB3263ZZ
: Clip
: Pawl
M
FUEL FILLER LID

N
REMOVAL O
DLK-965
JMKIB3183ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Unit: mm [in]
Clearance Evenness
3.7 – 5.3 (-1.0) – (+1.0)
(0.146 – 0.209) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
REMOVAL
assembly.
NOTE:
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
JMKIB1094ZZ

JMKIA5719ZZ
DLK-966
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
C
REMOVAL
LHD models
G
JMKIA5901ZZ
lation".
DLK
RHD models
O
JMKIA5672ZZ
Installation".
DLK-967
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
DLK-968
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
E
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION
DLK
DLK-969
KEYFOB BATTERY
KEYFOB BATTERY
REMOVAL
lower part.
CAUTION:
JMKIB3016ZZ

(CR2032)
CAUTION:
area.
INSTALLATION
DLK-970

DLK - Door & Lock PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DLK - Door & Lock PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DLK - Door & Lock PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION DLKDOOR & LOCK

WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 55 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 89

BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 67 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR ................. 91

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ................................ 83 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 104

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- K9K .......................................................................... 156

DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES R9M ......................................................................... 157

HRA2DDT .................................................................155 BACK DOOR HINGE .............................................. 174

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ..................................207 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 255

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ........................................208 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 258

HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 287 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH F

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH TELLIGENT KEY ............................................ 307

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- MR20DD .................................................................. 334

DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES K9K .......................................................................... 335

DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 376 E

HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 358 INSIDE KEY ANTENNA .................................. 377 F

SUPER LOCK FUNCTION .......................................390 REAR LH ................................................................. 420

BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM ................... 392 REAR RH ................................................................. 421

REAR LH ................................................................. 435 ALL DOOR ............................................................... 448

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 464

PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 507 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 549 I

FRONT DOOR ..........................................................574 AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT

REAR DOOR ............................................................579 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 597

HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 600 DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................ 618

HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 601 BACK DOOR ................................................... 171 C

DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 645 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION .................................. 664

TRUNK .................................................................... 676

HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 894 DOOR LOCK STATUS INDICATOR DOES

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Service information Destination

Precautions for Removing Battery Terminal INFOID:0000000010503427

D4D engine : 20 minutes

Tool name Description

Engine ear Locates the noise

Remover tool Removes the clips, pawls, and metal clips

System Description INFOID:0000000010434546

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION

Indicator operation Ignition position Door status Lock operation

UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION

• Doors are locked by door lock/unlock switch or by automatic lock/unlock function

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000010434548 M

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010434550

Each door request switch operation Operation condition

Unlock (all door unlock) Twice

Remote keyless entry receiver

CAN communication system

Push-button ignition switch

Hazard warning lamp

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000010683393

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION

Back door opener switch operation Operation condition A

LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS G

Outside key antenna (rear bumper)

Remote keyless entry receiver

Back door opener actuator

Back door opener switch